]>
Commit | Line | Data |
---|---|---|
b5e01d4b | 1 | @c Copyright (C) 1988, 1989, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1996, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, |
c5c367ac | 2 | @c 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
03dda8e3 RK |
3 | @c This is part of the GCC manual. |
4 | @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi. | |
5 | ||
6 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
7 | @node Machine Desc | |
8 | @chapter Machine Descriptions | |
9 | @cindex machine descriptions | |
10 | ||
11 | A machine description has two parts: a file of instruction patterns | |
12 | (@file{.md} file) and a C header file of macro definitions. | |
13 | ||
14 | The @file{.md} file for a target machine contains a pattern for each | |
15 | instruction that the target machine supports (or at least each instruction | |
16 | that is worth telling the compiler about). It may also contain comments. | |
17 | A semicolon causes the rest of the line to be a comment, unless the semicolon | |
18 | is inside a quoted string. | |
19 | ||
20 | See the next chapter for information on the C header file. | |
21 | ||
22 | @menu | |
55e4756f | 23 | * Overview:: How the machine description is used. |
03dda8e3 RK |
24 | * Patterns:: How to write instruction patterns. |
25 | * Example:: An explained example of a @code{define_insn} pattern. | |
26 | * RTL Template:: The RTL template defines what insns match a pattern. | |
27 | * Output Template:: The output template says how to make assembler code | |
28 | from such an insn. | |
29 | * Output Statement:: For more generality, write C code to output | |
30 | the assembler code. | |
e543e219 ZW |
31 | * Predicates:: Controlling what kinds of operands can be used |
32 | for an insn. | |
33 | * Constraints:: Fine-tuning operand selection. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
34 | * Standard Names:: Names mark patterns to use for code generation. |
35 | * Pattern Ordering:: When the order of patterns makes a difference. | |
36 | * Dependent Patterns:: Having one pattern may make you need another. | |
37 | * Jump Patterns:: Special considerations for patterns for jump insns. | |
6e4fcc95 | 38 | * Looping Patterns:: How to define patterns for special looping insns. |
03dda8e3 | 39 | * Insn Canonicalizations::Canonicalization of Instructions |
03dda8e3 | 40 | * Expander Definitions::Generating a sequence of several RTL insns |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
41 | for a standard operation. |
42 | * Insn Splitting:: Splitting Instructions into Multiple Instructions. | |
04d8aa70 | 43 | * Including Patterns:: Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions. |
f3a3d0d3 | 44 | * Peephole Definitions::Defining machine-specific peephole optimizations. |
03dda8e3 | 45 | * Insn Attributes:: Specifying the value of attributes for generated insns. |
3262c1f5 RH |
46 | * Conditional Execution::Generating @code{define_insn} patterns for |
47 | predication. | |
c25c12b8 R |
48 | * Constant Definitions::Defining symbolic constants that can be used in the |
49 | md file. | |
032e8348 | 50 | * Macros:: Using macros to generate patterns from a template. |
03dda8e3 RK |
51 | @end menu |
52 | ||
55e4756f DD |
53 | @node Overview |
54 | @section Overview of How the Machine Description is Used | |
55 | ||
56 | There are three main conversions that happen in the compiler: | |
57 | ||
58 | @enumerate | |
59 | ||
60 | @item | |
61 | The front end reads the source code and builds a parse tree. | |
62 | ||
63 | @item | |
64 | The parse tree is used to generate an RTL insn list based on named | |
65 | instruction patterns. | |
66 | ||
67 | @item | |
68 | The insn list is matched against the RTL templates to produce assembler | |
69 | code. | |
70 | ||
71 | @end enumerate | |
72 | ||
73 | For the generate pass, only the names of the insns matter, from either a | |
74 | named @code{define_insn} or a @code{define_expand}. The compiler will | |
75 | choose the pattern with the right name and apply the operands according | |
76 | to the documentation later in this chapter, without regard for the RTL | |
77 | template or operand constraints. Note that the names the compiler looks | |
d7d9c429 | 78 | for are hard-coded in the compiler---it will ignore unnamed patterns and |
55e4756f DD |
79 | patterns with names it doesn't know about, but if you don't provide a |
80 | named pattern it needs, it will abort. | |
81 | ||
82 | If a @code{define_insn} is used, the template given is inserted into the | |
83 | insn list. If a @code{define_expand} is used, one of three things | |
84 | happens, based on the condition logic. The condition logic may manually | |
85 | create new insns for the insn list, say via @code{emit_insn()}, and | |
aee96fe9 | 86 | invoke @code{DONE}. For certain named patterns, it may invoke @code{FAIL} to tell the |
55e4756f DD |
87 | compiler to use an alternate way of performing that task. If it invokes |
88 | neither @code{DONE} nor @code{FAIL}, the template given in the pattern | |
89 | is inserted, as if the @code{define_expand} were a @code{define_insn}. | |
90 | ||
91 | Once the insn list is generated, various optimization passes convert, | |
92 | replace, and rearrange the insns in the insn list. This is where the | |
93 | @code{define_split} and @code{define_peephole} patterns get used, for | |
94 | example. | |
95 | ||
96 | Finally, the insn list's RTL is matched up with the RTL templates in the | |
97 | @code{define_insn} patterns, and those patterns are used to emit the | |
98 | final assembly code. For this purpose, each named @code{define_insn} | |
99 | acts like it's unnamed, since the names are ignored. | |
100 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
101 | @node Patterns |
102 | @section Everything about Instruction Patterns | |
103 | @cindex patterns | |
104 | @cindex instruction patterns | |
105 | ||
106 | @findex define_insn | |
107 | Each instruction pattern contains an incomplete RTL expression, with pieces | |
108 | to be filled in later, operand constraints that restrict how the pieces can | |
109 | be filled in, and an output pattern or C code to generate the assembler | |
110 | output, all wrapped up in a @code{define_insn} expression. | |
111 | ||
112 | A @code{define_insn} is an RTL expression containing four or five operands: | |
113 | ||
114 | @enumerate | |
115 | @item | |
116 | An optional name. The presence of a name indicate that this instruction | |
117 | pattern can perform a certain standard job for the RTL-generation | |
118 | pass of the compiler. This pass knows certain names and will use | |
119 | the instruction patterns with those names, if the names are defined | |
120 | in the machine description. | |
121 | ||
122 | The absence of a name is indicated by writing an empty string | |
123 | where the name should go. Nameless instruction patterns are never | |
124 | used for generating RTL code, but they may permit several simpler insns | |
125 | to be combined later on. | |
126 | ||
127 | Names that are not thus known and used in RTL-generation have no | |
128 | effect; they are equivalent to no name at all. | |
129 | ||
661cb0b7 RK |
130 | For the purpose of debugging the compiler, you may also specify a |
131 | name beginning with the @samp{*} character. Such a name is used only | |
132 | for identifying the instruction in RTL dumps; it is entirely equivalent | |
133 | to having a nameless pattern for all other purposes. | |
134 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
135 | @item |
136 | The @dfn{RTL template} (@pxref{RTL Template}) is a vector of incomplete | |
137 | RTL expressions which show what the instruction should look like. It is | |
138 | incomplete because it may contain @code{match_operand}, | |
139 | @code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup} expressions that stand for | |
140 | operands of the instruction. | |
141 | ||
142 | If the vector has only one element, that element is the template for the | |
143 | instruction pattern. If the vector has multiple elements, then the | |
144 | instruction pattern is a @code{parallel} expression containing the | |
145 | elements described. | |
146 | ||
147 | @item | |
148 | @cindex pattern conditions | |
149 | @cindex conditions, in patterns | |
150 | A condition. This is a string which contains a C expression that is | |
151 | the final test to decide whether an insn body matches this pattern. | |
152 | ||
153 | @cindex named patterns and conditions | |
154 | For a named pattern, the condition (if present) may not depend on | |
155 | the data in the insn being matched, but only the target-machine-type | |
156 | flags. The compiler needs to test these conditions during | |
157 | initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions are | |
158 | available in a particular run. | |
159 | ||
160 | @findex operands | |
161 | For nameless patterns, the condition is applied only when matching an | |
162 | individual insn, and only after the insn has matched the pattern's | |
163 | recognition template. The insn's operands may be found in the vector | |
fde6d81f HPN |
164 | @code{operands}. For an insn where the condition has once matched, it |
165 | can't be used to control register allocation, for example by excluding | |
166 | certain hard registers or hard register combinations. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
167 | |
168 | @item | |
169 | The @dfn{output template}: a string that says how to output matching | |
170 | insns as assembler code. @samp{%} in this string specifies where | |
171 | to substitute the value of an operand. @xref{Output Template}. | |
172 | ||
173 | When simple substitution isn't general enough, you can specify a piece | |
174 | of C code to compute the output. @xref{Output Statement}. | |
175 | ||
176 | @item | |
177 | Optionally, a vector containing the values of attributes for insns matching | |
178 | this pattern. @xref{Insn Attributes}. | |
179 | @end enumerate | |
180 | ||
181 | @node Example | |
182 | @section Example of @code{define_insn} | |
183 | @cindex @code{define_insn} example | |
184 | ||
185 | Here is an actual example of an instruction pattern, for the 68000/68020. | |
186 | ||
3ab51846 | 187 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
188 | (define_insn "tstsi" |
189 | [(set (cc0) | |
190 | (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))] | |
191 | "" | |
192 | "* | |
f282ffb3 | 193 | @{ |
0f40f9f7 | 194 | if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0])) |
03dda8e3 | 195 | return \"tstl %0\"; |
f282ffb3 | 196 | return \"cmpl #0,%0\"; |
0f40f9f7 | 197 | @}") |
3ab51846 | 198 | @end smallexample |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
199 | |
200 | @noindent | |
201 | This can also be written using braced strings: | |
202 | ||
3ab51846 | 203 | @smallexample |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
204 | (define_insn "tstsi" |
205 | [(set (cc0) | |
206 | (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "rm"))] | |
207 | "" | |
f282ffb3 | 208 | @{ |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
209 | if (TARGET_68020 || ! ADDRESS_REG_P (operands[0])) |
210 | return "tstl %0"; | |
f282ffb3 | 211 | return "cmpl #0,%0"; |
0f40f9f7 | 212 | @}) |
3ab51846 | 213 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
214 | |
215 | This is an instruction that sets the condition codes based on the value of | |
216 | a general operand. It has no condition, so any insn whose RTL description | |
217 | has the form shown may be handled according to this pattern. The name | |
218 | @samp{tstsi} means ``test a @code{SImode} value'' and tells the RTL generation | |
219 | pass that, when it is necessary to test such a value, an insn to do so | |
220 | can be constructed using this pattern. | |
221 | ||
222 | The output control string is a piece of C code which chooses which | |
223 | output template to return based on the kind of operand and the specific | |
224 | type of CPU for which code is being generated. | |
225 | ||
226 | @samp{"rm"} is an operand constraint. Its meaning is explained below. | |
227 | ||
228 | @node RTL Template | |
229 | @section RTL Template | |
230 | @cindex RTL insn template | |
231 | @cindex generating insns | |
232 | @cindex insns, generating | |
233 | @cindex recognizing insns | |
234 | @cindex insns, recognizing | |
235 | ||
236 | The RTL template is used to define which insns match the particular pattern | |
237 | and how to find their operands. For named patterns, the RTL template also | |
238 | says how to construct an insn from specified operands. | |
239 | ||
240 | Construction involves substituting specified operands into a copy of the | |
241 | template. Matching involves determining the values that serve as the | |
242 | operands in the insn being matched. Both of these activities are | |
243 | controlled by special expression types that direct matching and | |
244 | substitution of the operands. | |
245 | ||
246 | @table @code | |
247 | @findex match_operand | |
248 | @item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} @var{constraint}) | |
249 | This expression is a placeholder for operand number @var{n} of | |
250 | the insn. When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} | |
251 | will be substituted at this point. When matching an insn, whatever | |
252 | appears at this position in the insn will be taken as operand | |
253 | number @var{n}; but it must satisfy @var{predicate} or this instruction | |
254 | pattern will not match at all. | |
255 | ||
256 | Operand numbers must be chosen consecutively counting from zero in | |
257 | each instruction pattern. There may be only one @code{match_operand} | |
258 | expression in the pattern for each operand number. Usually operands | |
259 | are numbered in the order of appearance in @code{match_operand} | |
72938a4c MM |
260 | expressions. In the case of a @code{define_expand}, any operand numbers |
261 | used only in @code{match_dup} expressions have higher values than all | |
262 | other operand numbers. | |
03dda8e3 | 263 | |
e543e219 ZW |
264 | @var{predicate} is a string that is the name of a function that |
265 | accepts two arguments, an expression and a machine mode. | |
266 | @xref{Predicates}. During matching, the function will be called with | |
267 | the putative operand as the expression and @var{m} as the mode | |
268 | argument (if @var{m} is not specified, @code{VOIDmode} will be used, | |
269 | which normally causes @var{predicate} to accept any mode). If it | |
270 | returns zero, this instruction pattern fails to match. | |
271 | @var{predicate} may be an empty string; then it means no test is to be | |
272 | done on the operand, so anything which occurs in this position is | |
273 | valid. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
274 | |
275 | Most of the time, @var{predicate} will reject modes other than @var{m}---but | |
276 | not always. For example, the predicate @code{address_operand} uses | |
277 | @var{m} as the mode of memory ref that the address should be valid for. | |
278 | Many predicates accept @code{const_int} nodes even though their mode is | |
279 | @code{VOIDmode}. | |
280 | ||
281 | @var{constraint} controls reloading and the choice of the best register | |
282 | class to use for a value, as explained later (@pxref{Constraints}). | |
e543e219 | 283 | If the constraint would be an empty string, it can be omitted. |
03dda8e3 RK |
284 | |
285 | People are often unclear on the difference between the constraint and the | |
286 | predicate. The predicate helps decide whether a given insn matches the | |
287 | pattern. The constraint plays no role in this decision; instead, it | |
288 | controls various decisions in the case of an insn which does match. | |
289 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
290 | @findex match_scratch |
291 | @item (match_scratch:@var{m} @var{n} @var{constraint}) | |
292 | This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n} | |
293 | and indicates that operand must be a @code{scratch} or @code{reg} | |
294 | expression. | |
295 | ||
296 | When matching patterns, this is equivalent to | |
297 | ||
298 | @smallexample | |
299 | (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} "scratch_operand" @var{pred}) | |
300 | @end smallexample | |
301 | ||
302 | but, when generating RTL, it produces a (@code{scratch}:@var{m}) | |
303 | expression. | |
304 | ||
305 | If the last few expressions in a @code{parallel} are @code{clobber} | |
306 | expressions whose operands are either a hard register or | |
307 | @code{match_scratch}, the combiner can add or delete them when | |
308 | necessary. @xref{Side Effects}. | |
309 | ||
310 | @findex match_dup | |
311 | @item (match_dup @var{n}) | |
312 | This expression is also a placeholder for operand number @var{n}. | |
313 | It is used when the operand needs to appear more than once in the | |
314 | insn. | |
315 | ||
316 | In construction, @code{match_dup} acts just like @code{match_operand}: | |
317 | the operand is substituted into the insn being constructed. But in | |
318 | matching, @code{match_dup} behaves differently. It assumes that operand | |
319 | number @var{n} has already been determined by a @code{match_operand} | |
320 | appearing earlier in the recognition template, and it matches only an | |
321 | identical-looking expression. | |
322 | ||
55e4756f DD |
323 | Note that @code{match_dup} should not be used to tell the compiler that |
324 | a particular register is being used for two operands (example: | |
325 | @code{add} that adds one register to another; the second register is | |
326 | both an input operand and the output operand). Use a matching | |
327 | constraint (@pxref{Simple Constraints}) for those. @code{match_dup} is for the cases where one | |
328 | operand is used in two places in the template, such as an instruction | |
329 | that computes both a quotient and a remainder, where the opcode takes | |
330 | two input operands but the RTL template has to refer to each of those | |
331 | twice; once for the quotient pattern and once for the remainder pattern. | |
332 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
333 | @findex match_operator |
334 | @item (match_operator:@var{m} @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{operands}@dots{}]) | |
335 | This pattern is a kind of placeholder for a variable RTL expression | |
336 | code. | |
337 | ||
338 | When constructing an insn, it stands for an RTL expression whose | |
339 | expression code is taken from that of operand @var{n}, and whose | |
340 | operands are constructed from the patterns @var{operands}. | |
341 | ||
342 | When matching an expression, it matches an expression if the function | |
343 | @var{predicate} returns nonzero on that expression @emph{and} the | |
344 | patterns @var{operands} match the operands of the expression. | |
345 | ||
346 | Suppose that the function @code{commutative_operator} is defined as | |
347 | follows, to match any expression whose operator is one of the | |
348 | commutative arithmetic operators of RTL and whose mode is @var{mode}: | |
349 | ||
350 | @smallexample | |
351 | int | |
ec8e098d | 352 | commutative_integer_operator (x, mode) |
03dda8e3 RK |
353 | rtx x; |
354 | enum machine_mode mode; | |
355 | @{ | |
356 | enum rtx_code code = GET_CODE (x); | |
357 | if (GET_MODE (x) != mode) | |
358 | return 0; | |
ec8e098d | 359 | return (GET_RTX_CLASS (code) == RTX_COMM_ARITH |
03dda8e3 RK |
360 | || code == EQ || code == NE); |
361 | @} | |
362 | @end smallexample | |
363 | ||
364 | Then the following pattern will match any RTL expression consisting | |
365 | of a commutative operator applied to two general operands: | |
366 | ||
367 | @smallexample | |
368 | (match_operator:SI 3 "commutative_operator" | |
369 | [(match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "g") | |
370 | (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g")]) | |
371 | @end smallexample | |
372 | ||
373 | Here the vector @code{[@var{operands}@dots{}]} contains two patterns | |
374 | because the expressions to be matched all contain two operands. | |
375 | ||
376 | When this pattern does match, the two operands of the commutative | |
377 | operator are recorded as operands 1 and 2 of the insn. (This is done | |
378 | by the two instances of @code{match_operand}.) Operand 3 of the insn | |
379 | will be the entire commutative expression: use @code{GET_CODE | |
380 | (operands[3])} to see which commutative operator was used. | |
381 | ||
382 | The machine mode @var{m} of @code{match_operator} works like that of | |
383 | @code{match_operand}: it is passed as the second argument to the | |
384 | predicate function, and that function is solely responsible for | |
385 | deciding whether the expression to be matched ``has'' that mode. | |
386 | ||
387 | When constructing an insn, argument 3 of the gen-function will specify | |
e979f9e8 | 388 | the operation (i.e.@: the expression code) for the expression to be |
03dda8e3 RK |
389 | made. It should be an RTL expression, whose expression code is copied |
390 | into a new expression whose operands are arguments 1 and 2 of the | |
391 | gen-function. The subexpressions of argument 3 are not used; | |
392 | only its expression code matters. | |
393 | ||
394 | When @code{match_operator} is used in a pattern for matching an insn, | |
395 | it usually best if the operand number of the @code{match_operator} | |
396 | is higher than that of the actual operands of the insn. This improves | |
397 | register allocation because the register allocator often looks at | |
398 | operands 1 and 2 of insns to see if it can do register tying. | |
399 | ||
400 | There is no way to specify constraints in @code{match_operator}. The | |
401 | operand of the insn which corresponds to the @code{match_operator} | |
402 | never has any constraints because it is never reloaded as a whole. | |
403 | However, if parts of its @var{operands} are matched by | |
404 | @code{match_operand} patterns, those parts may have constraints of | |
405 | their own. | |
406 | ||
407 | @findex match_op_dup | |
408 | @item (match_op_dup:@var{m} @var{n}[@var{operands}@dots{}]) | |
409 | Like @code{match_dup}, except that it applies to operators instead of | |
410 | operands. When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be | |
411 | substituted at this point. But in matching, @code{match_op_dup} behaves | |
412 | differently. It assumes that operand number @var{n} has already been | |
413 | determined by a @code{match_operator} appearing earlier in the | |
414 | recognition template, and it matches only an identical-looking | |
415 | expression. | |
416 | ||
417 | @findex match_parallel | |
418 | @item (match_parallel @var{n} @var{predicate} [@var{subpat}@dots{}]) | |
419 | This pattern is a placeholder for an insn that consists of a | |
420 | @code{parallel} expression with a variable number of elements. This | |
421 | expression should only appear at the top level of an insn pattern. | |
422 | ||
423 | When constructing an insn, operand number @var{n} will be substituted at | |
424 | this point. When matching an insn, it matches if the body of the insn | |
425 | is a @code{parallel} expression with at least as many elements as the | |
426 | vector of @var{subpat} expressions in the @code{match_parallel}, if each | |
427 | @var{subpat} matches the corresponding element of the @code{parallel}, | |
428 | @emph{and} the function @var{predicate} returns nonzero on the | |
429 | @code{parallel} that is the body of the insn. It is the responsibility | |
430 | of the predicate to validate elements of the @code{parallel} beyond | |
bd819a4a | 431 | those listed in the @code{match_parallel}. |
03dda8e3 RK |
432 | |
433 | A typical use of @code{match_parallel} is to match load and store | |
434 | multiple expressions, which can contain a variable number of elements | |
435 | in a @code{parallel}. For example, | |
03dda8e3 RK |
436 | |
437 | @smallexample | |
438 | (define_insn "" | |
439 | [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation" | |
440 | [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r") | |
441 | (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m")) | |
442 | (use (reg:SI 179)) | |
443 | (clobber (reg:SI 179))])] | |
444 | "" | |
445 | "loadm 0,0,%1,%2") | |
446 | @end smallexample | |
447 | ||
448 | This example comes from @file{a29k.md}. The function | |
9c34dbbf | 449 | @code{load_multiple_operation} is defined in @file{a29k.c} and checks |
03dda8e3 RK |
450 | that subsequent elements in the @code{parallel} are the same as the |
451 | @code{set} in the pattern, except that they are referencing subsequent | |
452 | registers and memory locations. | |
453 | ||
454 | An insn that matches this pattern might look like: | |
455 | ||
456 | @smallexample | |
457 | (parallel | |
458 | [(set (reg:SI 20) (mem:SI (reg:SI 100))) | |
459 | (use (reg:SI 179)) | |
460 | (clobber (reg:SI 179)) | |
461 | (set (reg:SI 21) | |
462 | (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100) | |
463 | (const_int 4)))) | |
464 | (set (reg:SI 22) | |
465 | (mem:SI (plus:SI (reg:SI 100) | |
466 | (const_int 8))))]) | |
467 | @end smallexample | |
468 | ||
469 | @findex match_par_dup | |
470 | @item (match_par_dup @var{n} [@var{subpat}@dots{}]) | |
471 | Like @code{match_op_dup}, but for @code{match_parallel} instead of | |
472 | @code{match_operator}. | |
473 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
474 | @end table |
475 | ||
476 | @node Output Template | |
477 | @section Output Templates and Operand Substitution | |
478 | @cindex output templates | |
479 | @cindex operand substitution | |
480 | ||
481 | @cindex @samp{%} in template | |
482 | @cindex percent sign | |
483 | The @dfn{output template} is a string which specifies how to output the | |
484 | assembler code for an instruction pattern. Most of the template is a | |
485 | fixed string which is output literally. The character @samp{%} is used | |
486 | to specify where to substitute an operand; it can also be used to | |
487 | identify places where different variants of the assembler require | |
488 | different syntax. | |
489 | ||
490 | In the simplest case, a @samp{%} followed by a digit @var{n} says to output | |
491 | operand @var{n} at that point in the string. | |
492 | ||
493 | @samp{%} followed by a letter and a digit says to output an operand in an | |
494 | alternate fashion. Four letters have standard, built-in meanings described | |
495 | below. The machine description macro @code{PRINT_OPERAND} can define | |
496 | additional letters with nonstandard meanings. | |
497 | ||
498 | @samp{%c@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand that is a | |
499 | constant value without the syntax that normally indicates an immediate | |
500 | operand. | |
501 | ||
502 | @samp{%n@var{digit}} is like @samp{%c@var{digit}} except that the value of | |
503 | the constant is negated before printing. | |
504 | ||
505 | @samp{%a@var{digit}} can be used to substitute an operand as if it were a | |
506 | memory reference, with the actual operand treated as the address. This may | |
507 | be useful when outputting a ``load address'' instruction, because often the | |
508 | assembler syntax for such an instruction requires you to write the operand | |
509 | as if it were a memory reference. | |
510 | ||
511 | @samp{%l@var{digit}} is used to substitute a @code{label_ref} into a jump | |
512 | instruction. | |
513 | ||
514 | @samp{%=} outputs a number which is unique to each instruction in the | |
515 | entire compilation. This is useful for making local labels to be | |
516 | referred to more than once in a single template that generates multiple | |
517 | assembler instructions. | |
518 | ||
519 | @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character specifies a substitution that | |
520 | does not use an operand. Only one case is standard: @samp{%%} outputs a | |
521 | @samp{%} into the assembler code. Other nonstandard cases can be | |
522 | defined in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. You must also define | |
523 | which punctuation characters are valid with the | |
524 | @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} macro. | |
525 | ||
526 | @cindex \ | |
527 | @cindex backslash | |
528 | The template may generate multiple assembler instructions. Write the text | |
529 | for the instructions, with @samp{\;} between them. | |
530 | ||
531 | @cindex matching operands | |
532 | When the RTL contains two operands which are required by constraint to match | |
533 | each other, the output template must refer only to the lower-numbered operand. | |
534 | Matching operands are not always identical, and the rest of the compiler | |
535 | arranges to put the proper RTL expression for printing into the lower-numbered | |
536 | operand. | |
537 | ||
538 | One use of nonstandard letters or punctuation following @samp{%} is to | |
539 | distinguish between different assembler languages for the same machine; for | |
540 | example, Motorola syntax versus MIT syntax for the 68000. Motorola syntax | |
541 | requires periods in most opcode names, while MIT syntax does not. For | |
542 | example, the opcode @samp{movel} in MIT syntax is @samp{move.l} in Motorola | |
543 | syntax. The same file of patterns is used for both kinds of output syntax, | |
544 | but the character sequence @samp{%.} is used in each place where Motorola | |
545 | syntax wants a period. The @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro for Motorola syntax | |
546 | defines the sequence to output a period; the macro for MIT syntax defines | |
547 | it to do nothing. | |
548 | ||
549 | @cindex @code{#} in template | |
550 | As a special case, a template consisting of the single character @code{#} | |
551 | instructs the compiler to first split the insn, and then output the | |
552 | resulting instructions separately. This helps eliminate redundancy in the | |
553 | output templates. If you have a @code{define_insn} that needs to emit | |
554 | multiple assembler instructions, and there is an matching @code{define_split} | |
555 | already defined, then you can simply use @code{#} as the output template | |
556 | instead of writing an output template that emits the multiple assembler | |
557 | instructions. | |
558 | ||
559 | If the macro @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is defined, you can use construct | |
560 | of the form @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@}} in the templates. These | |
561 | describe multiple variants of assembler language syntax. | |
562 | @xref{Instruction Output}. | |
563 | ||
564 | @node Output Statement | |
565 | @section C Statements for Assembler Output | |
566 | @cindex output statements | |
567 | @cindex C statements for assembler output | |
568 | @cindex generating assembler output | |
569 | ||
570 | Often a single fixed template string cannot produce correct and efficient | |
571 | assembler code for all the cases that are recognized by a single | |
572 | instruction pattern. For example, the opcodes may depend on the kinds of | |
573 | operands; or some unfortunate combinations of operands may require extra | |
574 | machine instructions. | |
575 | ||
576 | If the output control string starts with a @samp{@@}, then it is actually | |
577 | a series of templates, each on a separate line. (Blank lines and | |
578 | leading spaces and tabs are ignored.) The templates correspond to the | |
579 | pattern's constraint alternatives (@pxref{Multi-Alternative}). For example, | |
580 | if a target machine has a two-address add instruction @samp{addr} to add | |
581 | into a register and another @samp{addm} to add a register to memory, you | |
582 | might write this pattern: | |
583 | ||
584 | @smallexample | |
585 | (define_insn "addsi3" | |
586 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m") | |
587 | (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0,0") | |
588 | (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "g,r")))] | |
589 | "" | |
590 | "@@ | |
591 | addr %2,%0 | |
592 | addm %2,%0") | |
593 | @end smallexample | |
594 | ||
595 | @cindex @code{*} in template | |
596 | @cindex asterisk in template | |
597 | If the output control string starts with a @samp{*}, then it is not an | |
598 | output template but rather a piece of C program that should compute a | |
599 | template. It should execute a @code{return} statement to return the | |
600 | template-string you want. Most such templates use C string literals, which | |
601 | require doublequote characters to delimit them. To include these | |
602 | doublequote characters in the string, prefix each one with @samp{\}. | |
603 | ||
0f40f9f7 ZW |
604 | If the output control string is written as a brace block instead of a |
605 | double-quoted string, it is automatically assumed to be C code. In that | |
606 | case, it is not necessary to put in a leading asterisk, or to escape the | |
607 | doublequotes surrounding C string literals. | |
608 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
609 | The operands may be found in the array @code{operands}, whose C data type |
610 | is @code{rtx []}. | |
611 | ||
612 | It is very common to select different ways of generating assembler code | |
613 | based on whether an immediate operand is within a certain range. Be | |
614 | careful when doing this, because the result of @code{INTVAL} is an | |
615 | integer on the host machine. If the host machine has more bits in an | |
616 | @code{int} than the target machine has in the mode in which the constant | |
617 | will be used, then some of the bits you get from @code{INTVAL} will be | |
618 | superfluous. For proper results, you must carefully disregard the | |
619 | values of those bits. | |
620 | ||
621 | @findex output_asm_insn | |
622 | It is possible to output an assembler instruction and then go on to output | |
623 | or compute more of them, using the subroutine @code{output_asm_insn}. This | |
624 | receives two arguments: a template-string and a vector of operands. The | |
625 | vector may be @code{operands}, or it may be another array of @code{rtx} | |
626 | that you declare locally and initialize yourself. | |
627 | ||
628 | @findex which_alternative | |
629 | When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often | |
630 | the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which alternative | |
631 | was matched. When this is so, the C code can test the variable | |
632 | @code{which_alternative}, which is the ordinal number of the alternative | |
633 | that was actually satisfied (0 for the first, 1 for the second alternative, | |
634 | etc.). | |
635 | ||
636 | For example, suppose there are two opcodes for storing zero, @samp{clrreg} | |
637 | for registers and @samp{clrmem} for memory locations. Here is how | |
638 | a pattern could use @code{which_alternative} to choose between them: | |
639 | ||
640 | @smallexample | |
641 | (define_insn "" | |
642 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m") | |
643 | (const_int 0))] | |
644 | "" | |
0f40f9f7 | 645 | @{ |
03dda8e3 | 646 | return (which_alternative == 0 |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
647 | ? "clrreg %0" : "clrmem %0"); |
648 | @}) | |
03dda8e3 RK |
649 | @end smallexample |
650 | ||
651 | The example above, where the assembler code to generate was | |
652 | @emph{solely} determined by the alternative, could also have been specified | |
653 | as follows, having the output control string start with a @samp{@@}: | |
654 | ||
655 | @smallexample | |
656 | @group | |
657 | (define_insn "" | |
658 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,m") | |
659 | (const_int 0))] | |
660 | "" | |
661 | "@@ | |
662 | clrreg %0 | |
663 | clrmem %0") | |
664 | @end group | |
665 | @end smallexample | |
e543e219 ZW |
666 | |
667 | @node Predicates | |
668 | @section Predicates | |
669 | @cindex predicates | |
670 | @cindex operand predicates | |
671 | @cindex operator predicates | |
672 | ||
673 | A predicate determines whether a @code{match_operand} or | |
674 | @code{match_operator} expression matches, and therefore whether the | |
675 | surrounding instruction pattern will be used for that combination of | |
676 | operands. GCC has a number of machine-independent predicates, and you | |
677 | can define machine-specific predicates as needed. By convention, | |
678 | predicates used with @code{match_operand} have names that end in | |
679 | @samp{_operand}, and those used with @code{match_operator} have names | |
680 | that end in @samp{_operator}. | |
681 | ||
682 | All predicates are Boolean functions (in the mathematical sense) of | |
683 | two arguments: the RTL expression that is being considered at that | |
684 | position in the instruction pattern, and the machine mode that the | |
685 | @code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} specifies. In this | |
686 | section, the first argument is called @var{op} and the second argument | |
687 | @var{mode}. Predicates can be called from C as ordinary two-argument | |
688 | functions; this can be useful in output templates or other | |
689 | machine-specific code. | |
690 | ||
691 | Operand predicates can allow operands that are not actually acceptable | |
692 | to the hardware, as long as the constraints give reload the ability to | |
693 | fix them up (@pxref{Constraints}). However, GCC will usually generate | |
694 | better code if the predicates specify the requirements of the machine | |
695 | instructions as closely as possible. Reload cannot fix up operands | |
696 | that must be constants (``immediate operands''); you must use a | |
697 | predicate that allows only constants, or else enforce the requirement | |
698 | in the extra condition. | |
699 | ||
700 | @cindex predicates and machine modes | |
701 | @cindex normal predicates | |
702 | @cindex special predicates | |
703 | Most predicates handle their @var{mode} argument in a uniform manner. | |
704 | If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode} (unspecified), then @var{op} can have | |
705 | any mode. If @var{mode} is anything else, then @var{op} must have the | |
706 | same mode, unless @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or integer | |
707 | @code{CONST_DOUBLE}. These RTL expressions always have | |
708 | @code{VOIDmode}, so it would be counterproductive to check that their | |
709 | mode matches. Instead, predicates that accept @code{CONST_INT} and/or | |
710 | integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE} check that the value stored in the | |
711 | constant will fit in the requested mode. | |
712 | ||
713 | Predicates with this behavior are called @dfn{normal}. | |
714 | @command{genrecog} can optimize the instruction recognizer based on | |
715 | knowledge of how normal predicates treat modes. It can also diagnose | |
716 | certain kinds of common errors in the use of normal predicates; for | |
717 | instance, it is almost always an error to use a normal predicate | |
718 | without specifying a mode. | |
719 | ||
720 | Predicates that do something different with their @var{mode} argument | |
721 | are called @dfn{special}. The generic predicates | |
722 | @code{address_operand} and @code{pmode_register_operand} are special | |
723 | predicates. @command{genrecog} does not do any optimizations or | |
724 | diagnosis when special predicates are used. | |
725 | ||
726 | @menu | |
727 | * Machine-Independent Predicates:: Predicates available to all back ends. | |
728 | * Defining Predicates:: How to write machine-specific predicate | |
729 | functions. | |
730 | @end menu | |
731 | ||
732 | @node Machine-Independent Predicates | |
733 | @subsection Machine-Independent Predicates | |
734 | @cindex machine-independent predicates | |
735 | @cindex generic predicates | |
736 | ||
737 | These are the generic predicates available to all back ends. They are | |
738 | defined in @file{recog.c}. The first category of predicates allow | |
739 | only constant, or @dfn{immediate}, operands. | |
740 | ||
741 | @defun immediate_operand | |
742 | This predicate allows any sort of constant that fits in @var{mode}. | |
743 | It is an appropriate choice for instructions that take operands that | |
744 | must be constant. | |
745 | @end defun | |
746 | ||
747 | @defun const_int_operand | |
748 | This predicate allows any @code{CONST_INT} expression that fits in | |
749 | @var{mode}. It is an appropriate choice for an immediate operand that | |
750 | does not allow a symbol or label. | |
751 | @end defun | |
752 | ||
753 | @defun const_double_operand | |
754 | This predicate accepts any @code{CONST_DOUBLE} expression that has | |
755 | exactly @var{mode}. If @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, it will also | |
756 | accept @code{CONST_INT}. It is intended for immediate floating point | |
757 | constants. | |
758 | @end defun | |
759 | ||
760 | @noindent | |
761 | The second category of predicates allow only some kind of machine | |
762 | register. | |
763 | ||
764 | @defun register_operand | |
765 | This predicate allows any @code{REG} or @code{SUBREG} expression that | |
766 | is valid for @var{mode}. It is often suitable for arithmetic | |
767 | instruction operands on a RISC machine. | |
768 | @end defun | |
769 | ||
770 | @defun pmode_register_operand | |
771 | This is a slight variant on @code{register_operand} which works around | |
772 | a limitation in the machine-description reader. | |
773 | ||
cd1a8088 | 774 | @smallexample |
e543e219 | 775 | (match_operand @var{n} "pmode_register_operand" @var{constraint}) |
cd1a8088 | 776 | @end smallexample |
e543e219 ZW |
777 | |
778 | @noindent | |
779 | means exactly what | |
780 | ||
cd1a8088 | 781 | @smallexample |
e543e219 | 782 | (match_operand:P @var{n} "register_operand" @var{constraint}) |
cd1a8088 | 783 | @end smallexample |
e543e219 ZW |
784 | |
785 | @noindent | |
786 | would mean, if the machine-description reader accepted @samp{:P} | |
787 | mode suffixes. Unfortunately, it cannot, because @code{Pmode} is an | |
788 | alias for some other mode, and might vary with machine-specific | |
8a36672b | 789 | options. @xref{Misc}. |
e543e219 ZW |
790 | @end defun |
791 | ||
792 | @defun scratch_operand | |
793 | This predicate allows hard registers and @code{SCRATCH} expressions, | |
794 | but not pseudo-registers. It is used internally by @code{match_scratch}; | |
795 | it should not be used directly. | |
796 | @end defun | |
797 | ||
798 | @noindent | |
799 | The third category of predicates allow only some kind of memory reference. | |
800 | ||
801 | @defun memory_operand | |
802 | This predicate allows any valid reference to a quantity of mode | |
803 | @var{mode} in memory, as determined by the weak form of | |
804 | @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} (@pxref{Addressing Modes}). | |
805 | @end defun | |
806 | ||
807 | @defun address_operand | |
808 | This predicate is a little unusual; it allows any operand that is a | |
809 | valid expression for the @emph{address} of a quantity of mode | |
810 | @var{mode}, again determined by the weak form of | |
811 | @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}. To first order, if | |
812 | @samp{@w{(mem:@var{mode} (@var{exp}))}} is acceptable to | |
813 | @code{memory_operand}, then @var{exp} is acceptable to | |
814 | @code{address_operand}. Note that @var{exp} does not necessarily have | |
815 | the mode @var{mode}. | |
816 | @end defun | |
817 | ||
818 | @defun indirect_operand | |
819 | This is a stricter form of @code{memory_operand} which allows only | |
820 | memory references with a @code{general_operand} as the address | |
821 | expression. New uses of this predicate are discouraged, because | |
822 | @code{general_operand} is very permissive, so it's hard to tell what | |
823 | an @code{indirect_operand} does or does not allow. If a target has | |
824 | different requirements for memory operands for different instructions, | |
825 | it is better to define target-specific predicates which enforce the | |
826 | hardware's requirements explicitly. | |
827 | @end defun | |
828 | ||
829 | @defun push_operand | |
830 | This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for pushing a value | |
831 | onto the stack. This will be a @code{MEM} which refers to | |
832 | @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address expression | |
833 | (@pxref{Incdec}); which one is determined by the | |
834 | @code{STACK_PUSH_CODE} macro (@pxref{Frame Layout}). | |
835 | @end defun | |
836 | ||
837 | @defun pop_operand | |
838 | This predicate allows a memory reference suitable for popping a value | |
839 | off the stack. Again, this will be a @code{MEM} referring to | |
840 | @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, with a side-effect in its address | |
841 | expression. However, this time @code{STACK_POP_CODE} is expected. | |
842 | @end defun | |
843 | ||
844 | @noindent | |
845 | The fourth category of predicates allow some combination of the above | |
846 | operands. | |
847 | ||
848 | @defun nonmemory_operand | |
849 | This predicate allows any immediate or register operand valid for @var{mode}. | |
850 | @end defun | |
851 | ||
852 | @defun nonimmediate_operand | |
853 | This predicate allows any register or memory operand valid for @var{mode}. | |
854 | @end defun | |
855 | ||
856 | @defun general_operand | |
857 | This predicate allows any immediate, register, or memory operand | |
858 | valid for @var{mode}. | |
859 | @end defun | |
860 | ||
861 | @noindent | |
862 | Finally, there is one generic operator predicate. | |
863 | ||
864 | @defun comparison_operator | |
865 | This predicate matches any expression which performs an arithmetic | |
866 | comparison in @var{mode}; that is, @code{COMPARISON_P} is true for the | |
867 | expression code. | |
868 | @end defun | |
869 | ||
870 | @node Defining Predicates | |
871 | @subsection Defining Machine-Specific Predicates | |
872 | @cindex defining predicates | |
873 | @findex define_predicate | |
874 | @findex define_special_predicate | |
875 | ||
876 | Many machines have requirements for their operands that cannot be | |
877 | expressed precisely using the generic predicates. You can define | |
878 | additional predicates using @code{define_predicate} and | |
879 | @code{define_special_predicate} expressions. These expressions have | |
880 | three operands: | |
881 | ||
882 | @itemize @bullet | |
883 | @item | |
884 | The name of the predicate, as it will be referred to in | |
885 | @code{match_operand} or @code{match_operator} expressions. | |
886 | ||
887 | @item | |
888 | An RTL expression which evaluates to true if the predicate allows the | |
889 | operand @var{op}, false if it does not. This expression can only use | |
890 | the following RTL codes: | |
891 | ||
892 | @table @code | |
893 | @item MATCH_OPERAND | |
894 | When written inside a predicate expression, a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} | |
895 | expression evaluates to true if the predicate it names would allow | |
896 | @var{op}. The operand number and constraint are ignored. Due to | |
897 | limitations in @command{genrecog}, you can only refer to generic | |
898 | predicates and predicates that have already been defined. | |
899 | ||
900 | @item MATCH_CODE | |
901 | This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a | |
902 | comma-separated list of RTX code names (in lower case). It evaluates | |
903 | to true if @var{op} has any of the listed codes. | |
904 | ||
905 | @item MATCH_TEST | |
906 | This expression has one operand, a string constant containing a C | |
907 | expression. The predicate's arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are | |
908 | available with those names in the C expression. The @code{MATCH_TEST} | |
909 | evaluates to true if the C expression evaluates to a nonzero value. | |
910 | @code{MATCH_TEST} expressions must not have side effects. | |
911 | ||
912 | @item AND | |
913 | @itemx IOR | |
914 | @itemx NOT | |
915 | @itemx IF_THEN_ELSE | |
916 | The basic @samp{MATCH_} expressions can be combined using these | |
917 | logical operators, which have the semantics of the C operators | |
918 | @samp{&&}, @samp{||}, @samp{!}, and @samp{@w{? :}} respectively. | |
919 | @end table | |
920 | ||
921 | @item | |
f0eb93a8 | 922 | An optional block of C code, which should execute |
e543e219 ZW |
923 | @samp{@w{return true}} if the predicate is found to match and |
924 | @samp{@w{return false}} if it does not. It must not have any side | |
925 | effects. The predicate arguments, @var{op} and @var{mode}, are | |
926 | available with those names. | |
927 | ||
928 | If a code block is present in a predicate definition, then the RTL | |
929 | expression must evaluate to true @emph{and} the code block must | |
930 | execute @samp{@w{return true}} for the predicate to allow the operand. | |
931 | The RTL expression is evaluated first; do not re-check anything in the | |
932 | code block that was checked in the RTL expression. | |
933 | @end itemize | |
934 | ||
935 | The program @command{genrecog} scans @code{define_predicate} and | |
936 | @code{define_special_predicate} expressions to determine which RTX | |
937 | codes are possibly allowed. You should always make this explicit in | |
938 | the RTL predicate expression, using @code{MATCH_OPERAND} and | |
939 | @code{MATCH_CODE}. | |
940 | ||
941 | Here is an example of a simple predicate definition, from the IA64 | |
942 | machine description: | |
943 | ||
944 | @smallexample | |
945 | @group | |
946 | ;; @r{True if @var{op} is a @code{SYMBOL_REF} which refers to the sdata section.} | |
947 | (define_predicate "small_addr_symbolic_operand" | |
948 | (and (match_code "symbol_ref") | |
949 | (match_test "SYMBOL_REF_SMALL_ADDR_P (op)"))) | |
950 | @end group | |
951 | @end smallexample | |
952 | ||
953 | @noindent | |
954 | And here is another, showing the use of the C block. | |
955 | ||
956 | @smallexample | |
957 | @group | |
958 | ;; @r{True if @var{op} is a register operand that is (or could be) a GR reg.} | |
959 | (define_predicate "gr_register_operand" | |
960 | (match_operand 0 "register_operand") | |
961 | @{ | |
962 | unsigned int regno; | |
963 | if (GET_CODE (op) == SUBREG) | |
964 | op = SUBREG_REG (op); | |
965 | ||
966 | regno = REGNO (op); | |
967 | return (regno >= FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER || GENERAL_REGNO_P (regno)); | |
968 | @}) | |
969 | @end group | |
970 | @end smallexample | |
971 | ||
972 | Predicates written with @code{define_predicate} automatically include | |
973 | a test that @var{mode} is @code{VOIDmode}, or @var{op} has the same | |
974 | mode as @var{mode}, or @var{op} is a @code{CONST_INT} or | |
975 | @code{CONST_DOUBLE}. They do @emph{not} check specifically for | |
976 | integer @code{CONST_DOUBLE}, nor do they test that the value of either | |
977 | kind of constant fits in the requested mode. This is because | |
978 | target-specific predicates that take constants usually have to do more | |
979 | stringent value checks anyway. If you need the exact same treatment | |
980 | of @code{CONST_INT} or @code{CONST_DOUBLE} that the generic predicates | |
981 | provide, use a @code{MATCH_OPERAND} subexpression to call | |
982 | @code{const_int_operand}, @code{const_double_operand}, or | |
983 | @code{immediate_operand}. | |
984 | ||
985 | Predicates written with @code{define_special_predicate} do not get any | |
986 | automatic mode checks, and are treated as having special mode handling | |
987 | by @command{genrecog}. | |
988 | ||
989 | The program @command{genpreds} is responsible for generating code to | |
990 | test predicates. It also writes a header file containing function | |
991 | declarations for all machine-specific predicates. It is not necessary | |
992 | to declare these predicates in @file{@var{cpu}-protos.h}. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
993 | @end ifset |
994 | ||
995 | @c Most of this node appears by itself (in a different place) even | |
b11cc610 JM |
996 | @c when the INTERNALS flag is clear. Passages that require the internals |
997 | @c manual's context are conditionalized to appear only in the internals manual. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
998 | @ifset INTERNALS |
999 | @node Constraints | |
1000 | @section Operand Constraints | |
1001 | @cindex operand constraints | |
1002 | @cindex constraints | |
1003 | ||
e543e219 ZW |
1004 | Each @code{match_operand} in an instruction pattern can specify |
1005 | constraints for the operands allowed. The constraints allow you to | |
1006 | fine-tune matching within the set of operands allowed by the | |
1007 | predicate. | |
1008 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1009 | @end ifset |
1010 | @ifclear INTERNALS | |
1011 | @node Constraints | |
1012 | @section Constraints for @code{asm} Operands | |
1013 | @cindex operand constraints, @code{asm} | |
1014 | @cindex constraints, @code{asm} | |
1015 | @cindex @code{asm} constraints | |
1016 | ||
1017 | Here are specific details on what constraint letters you can use with | |
1018 | @code{asm} operands. | |
1019 | @end ifclear | |
1020 | Constraints can say whether | |
1021 | an operand may be in a register, and which kinds of register; whether the | |
1022 | operand can be a memory reference, and which kinds of address; whether the | |
1023 | operand may be an immediate constant, and which possible values it may | |
1024 | have. Constraints can also require two operands to match. | |
1025 | ||
1026 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1027 | @menu | |
1028 | * Simple Constraints:: Basic use of constraints. | |
1029 | * Multi-Alternative:: When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns. | |
1030 | * Class Preferences:: Constraints guide which hard register to put things in. | |
1031 | * Modifiers:: More precise control over effects of constraints. | |
1032 | * Machine Constraints:: Existing constraints for some particular machines. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
1033 | @end menu |
1034 | @end ifset | |
1035 | ||
1036 | @ifclear INTERNALS | |
1037 | @menu | |
1038 | * Simple Constraints:: Basic use of constraints. | |
1039 | * Multi-Alternative:: When an insn has two alternative constraint-patterns. | |
1040 | * Modifiers:: More precise control over effects of constraints. | |
1041 | * Machine Constraints:: Special constraints for some particular machines. | |
1042 | @end menu | |
1043 | @end ifclear | |
1044 | ||
1045 | @node Simple Constraints | |
1046 | @subsection Simple Constraints | |
1047 | @cindex simple constraints | |
1048 | ||
1049 | The simplest kind of constraint is a string full of letters, each of | |
1050 | which describes one kind of operand that is permitted. Here are | |
1051 | the letters that are allowed: | |
1052 | ||
1053 | @table @asis | |
88a56c2e HPN |
1054 | @item whitespace |
1055 | Whitespace characters are ignored and can be inserted at any position | |
1056 | except the first. This enables each alternative for different operands to | |
1057 | be visually aligned in the machine description even if they have different | |
1058 | number of constraints and modifiers. | |
1059 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1060 | @cindex @samp{m} in constraint |
1061 | @cindex memory references in constraints | |
1062 | @item @samp{m} | |
1063 | A memory operand is allowed, with any kind of address that the machine | |
1064 | supports in general. | |
1065 | ||
1066 | @cindex offsettable address | |
1067 | @cindex @samp{o} in constraint | |
1068 | @item @samp{o} | |
1069 | A memory operand is allowed, but only if the address is | |
1070 | @dfn{offsettable}. This means that adding a small integer (actually, | |
1071 | the width in bytes of the operand, as determined by its machine mode) | |
1072 | may be added to the address and the result is also a valid memory | |
1073 | address. | |
1074 | ||
1075 | @cindex autoincrement/decrement addressing | |
1076 | For example, an address which is constant is offsettable; so is an | |
1077 | address that is the sum of a register and a constant (as long as a | |
1078 | slightly larger constant is also within the range of address-offsets | |
1079 | supported by the machine); but an autoincrement or autodecrement | |
1080 | address is not offsettable. More complicated indirect/indexed | |
1081 | addresses may or may not be offsettable depending on the other | |
1082 | addressing modes that the machine supports. | |
1083 | ||
1084 | Note that in an output operand which can be matched by another | |
1085 | operand, the constraint letter @samp{o} is valid only when accompanied | |
1086 | by both @samp{<} (if the target machine has predecrement addressing) | |
1087 | and @samp{>} (if the target machine has preincrement addressing). | |
1088 | ||
1089 | @cindex @samp{V} in constraint | |
1090 | @item @samp{V} | |
1091 | A memory operand that is not offsettable. In other words, anything that | |
1092 | would fit the @samp{m} constraint but not the @samp{o} constraint. | |
1093 | ||
1094 | @cindex @samp{<} in constraint | |
1095 | @item @samp{<} | |
1096 | A memory operand with autodecrement addressing (either predecrement or | |
1097 | postdecrement) is allowed. | |
1098 | ||
1099 | @cindex @samp{>} in constraint | |
1100 | @item @samp{>} | |
1101 | A memory operand with autoincrement addressing (either preincrement or | |
1102 | postincrement) is allowed. | |
1103 | ||
1104 | @cindex @samp{r} in constraint | |
1105 | @cindex registers in constraints | |
1106 | @item @samp{r} | |
1107 | A register operand is allowed provided that it is in a general | |
1108 | register. | |
1109 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1110 | @cindex constants in constraints |
1111 | @cindex @samp{i} in constraint | |
1112 | @item @samp{i} | |
1113 | An immediate integer operand (one with constant value) is allowed. | |
1114 | This includes symbolic constants whose values will be known only at | |
8ac658b6 | 1115 | assembly time or later. |
03dda8e3 RK |
1116 | |
1117 | @cindex @samp{n} in constraint | |
1118 | @item @samp{n} | |
1119 | An immediate integer operand with a known numeric value is allowed. | |
1120 | Many systems cannot support assembly-time constants for operands less | |
1121 | than a word wide. Constraints for these operands should use @samp{n} | |
1122 | rather than @samp{i}. | |
1123 | ||
1124 | @cindex @samp{I} in constraint | |
1125 | @item @samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P} | |
1126 | Other letters in the range @samp{I} through @samp{P} may be defined in | |
1127 | a machine-dependent fashion to permit immediate integer operands with | |
1128 | explicit integer values in specified ranges. For example, on the | |
1129 | 68000, @samp{I} is defined to stand for the range of values 1 to 8. | |
1130 | This is the range permitted as a shift count in the shift | |
1131 | instructions. | |
1132 | ||
1133 | @cindex @samp{E} in constraint | |
1134 | @item @samp{E} | |
1135 | An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double}) is | |
1136 | allowed, but only if the target floating point format is the same as | |
1137 | that of the host machine (on which the compiler is running). | |
1138 | ||
1139 | @cindex @samp{F} in constraint | |
1140 | @item @samp{F} | |
bf7cd754 R |
1141 | An immediate floating operand (expression code @code{const_double} or |
1142 | @code{const_vector}) is allowed. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
1143 | |
1144 | @cindex @samp{G} in constraint | |
1145 | @cindex @samp{H} in constraint | |
1146 | @item @samp{G}, @samp{H} | |
1147 | @samp{G} and @samp{H} may be defined in a machine-dependent fashion to | |
1148 | permit immediate floating operands in particular ranges of values. | |
1149 | ||
1150 | @cindex @samp{s} in constraint | |
1151 | @item @samp{s} | |
1152 | An immediate integer operand whose value is not an explicit integer is | |
1153 | allowed. | |
1154 | ||
1155 | This might appear strange; if an insn allows a constant operand with a | |
1156 | value not known at compile time, it certainly must allow any known | |
1157 | value. So why use @samp{s} instead of @samp{i}? Sometimes it allows | |
1158 | better code to be generated. | |
1159 | ||
1160 | For example, on the 68000 in a fullword instruction it is possible to | |
630d3d5a | 1161 | use an immediate operand; but if the immediate value is between @minus{}128 |
03dda8e3 RK |
1162 | and 127, better code results from loading the value into a register and |
1163 | using the register. This is because the load into the register can be | |
1164 | done with a @samp{moveq} instruction. We arrange for this to happen | |
1165 | by defining the letter @samp{K} to mean ``any integer outside the | |
630d3d5a | 1166 | range @minus{}128 to 127'', and then specifying @samp{Ks} in the operand |
03dda8e3 RK |
1167 | constraints. |
1168 | ||
1169 | @cindex @samp{g} in constraint | |
1170 | @item @samp{g} | |
1171 | Any register, memory or immediate integer operand is allowed, except for | |
1172 | registers that are not general registers. | |
1173 | ||
1174 | @cindex @samp{X} in constraint | |
1175 | @item @samp{X} | |
1176 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1177 | Any operand whatsoever is allowed, even if it does not satisfy | |
1178 | @code{general_operand}. This is normally used in the constraint of | |
1179 | a @code{match_scratch} when certain alternatives will not actually | |
1180 | require a scratch register. | |
1181 | @end ifset | |
1182 | @ifclear INTERNALS | |
1183 | Any operand whatsoever is allowed. | |
1184 | @end ifclear | |
1185 | ||
1186 | @cindex @samp{0} in constraint | |
1187 | @cindex digits in constraint | |
1188 | @item @samp{0}, @samp{1}, @samp{2}, @dots{} @samp{9} | |
1189 | An operand that matches the specified operand number is allowed. If a | |
1190 | digit is used together with letters within the same alternative, the | |
1191 | digit should come last. | |
1192 | ||
84b72302 | 1193 | This number is allowed to be more than a single digit. If multiple |
c0478a66 | 1194 | digits are encountered consecutively, they are interpreted as a single |
84b72302 RH |
1195 | decimal integer. There is scant chance for ambiguity, since to-date |
1196 | it has never been desirable that @samp{10} be interpreted as matching | |
1197 | either operand 1 @emph{or} operand 0. Should this be desired, one | |
1198 | can use multiple alternatives instead. | |
1199 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1200 | @cindex matching constraint |
1201 | @cindex constraint, matching | |
1202 | This is called a @dfn{matching constraint} and what it really means is | |
1203 | that the assembler has only a single operand that fills two roles | |
1204 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1205 | considered separate in the RTL insn. For example, an add insn has two | |
1206 | input operands and one output operand in the RTL, but on most CISC | |
1207 | @end ifset | |
1208 | @ifclear INTERNALS | |
1209 | which @code{asm} distinguishes. For example, an add instruction uses | |
1210 | two input operands and an output operand, but on most CISC | |
1211 | @end ifclear | |
1212 | machines an add instruction really has only two operands, one of them an | |
1213 | input-output operand: | |
1214 | ||
1215 | @smallexample | |
1216 | addl #35,r12 | |
1217 | @end smallexample | |
1218 | ||
1219 | Matching constraints are used in these circumstances. | |
1220 | More precisely, the two operands that match must include one input-only | |
1221 | operand and one output-only operand. Moreover, the digit must be a | |
1222 | smaller number than the number of the operand that uses it in the | |
1223 | constraint. | |
1224 | ||
1225 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1226 | For operands to match in a particular case usually means that they | |
1227 | are identical-looking RTL expressions. But in a few special cases | |
1228 | specific kinds of dissimilarity are allowed. For example, @code{*x} | |
1229 | as an input operand will match @code{*x++} as an output operand. | |
1230 | For proper results in such cases, the output template should always | |
1231 | use the output-operand's number when printing the operand. | |
1232 | @end ifset | |
1233 | ||
1234 | @cindex load address instruction | |
1235 | @cindex push address instruction | |
1236 | @cindex address constraints | |
1237 | @cindex @samp{p} in constraint | |
1238 | @item @samp{p} | |
1239 | An operand that is a valid memory address is allowed. This is | |
1240 | for ``load address'' and ``push address'' instructions. | |
1241 | ||
1242 | @findex address_operand | |
1243 | @samp{p} in the constraint must be accompanied by @code{address_operand} | |
1244 | as the predicate in the @code{match_operand}. This predicate interprets | |
1245 | the mode specified in the @code{match_operand} as the mode of the memory | |
1246 | reference for which the address would be valid. | |
1247 | ||
c2cba7a9 | 1248 | @cindex other register constraints |
03dda8e3 | 1249 | @cindex extensible constraints |
630d3d5a | 1250 | @item @var{other-letters} |
c2cba7a9 RH |
1251 | Other letters can be defined in machine-dependent fashion to stand for |
1252 | particular classes of registers or other arbitrary operand types. | |
1253 | @samp{d}, @samp{a} and @samp{f} are defined on the 68000/68020 to stand | |
1254 | for data, address and floating point registers. | |
03dda8e3 | 1255 | |
c2cba7a9 RH |
1256 | @ifset INTERNALS |
1257 | The machine description macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} has first | |
1258 | cut at the otherwise unused letters. If it evaluates to @code{NO_REGS}, | |
1259 | then @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT} is evaluated. | |
03dda8e3 | 1260 | |
c0478a66 | 1261 | A typical use for @code{EXTRA_CONSTRAINT} would be to distinguish certain |
c2cba7a9 | 1262 | types of memory references that affect other insn operands. |
03dda8e3 RK |
1263 | @end ifset |
1264 | @end table | |
1265 | ||
1266 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1267 | In order to have valid assembler code, each operand must satisfy | |
1268 | its constraint. But a failure to do so does not prevent the pattern | |
1269 | from applying to an insn. Instead, it directs the compiler to modify | |
1270 | the code so that the constraint will be satisfied. Usually this is | |
1271 | done by copying an operand into a register. | |
1272 | ||
1273 | Contrast, therefore, the two instruction patterns that follow: | |
1274 | ||
1275 | @smallexample | |
1276 | (define_insn "" | |
1277 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r") | |
1278 | (plus:SI (match_dup 0) | |
1279 | (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r")))] | |
1280 | "" | |
1281 | "@dots{}") | |
1282 | @end smallexample | |
1283 | ||
1284 | @noindent | |
1285 | which has two operands, one of which must appear in two places, and | |
1286 | ||
1287 | @smallexample | |
1288 | (define_insn "" | |
1289 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r") | |
1290 | (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0") | |
1291 | (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "r")))] | |
1292 | "" | |
1293 | "@dots{}") | |
1294 | @end smallexample | |
1295 | ||
1296 | @noindent | |
1297 | which has three operands, two of which are required by a constraint to be | |
1298 | identical. If we are considering an insn of the form | |
1299 | ||
1300 | @smallexample | |
1301 | (insn @var{n} @var{prev} @var{next} | |
1302 | (set (reg:SI 3) | |
1303 | (plus:SI (reg:SI 6) (reg:SI 109))) | |
1304 | @dots{}) | |
1305 | @end smallexample | |
1306 | ||
1307 | @noindent | |
1308 | the first pattern would not apply at all, because this insn does not | |
1309 | contain two identical subexpressions in the right place. The pattern would | |
d78aa55c | 1310 | say, ``That does not look like an add instruction; try other patterns''. |
03dda8e3 | 1311 | The second pattern would say, ``Yes, that's an add instruction, but there |
d78aa55c | 1312 | is something wrong with it''. It would direct the reload pass of the |
03dda8e3 RK |
1313 | compiler to generate additional insns to make the constraint true. The |
1314 | results might look like this: | |
1315 | ||
1316 | @smallexample | |
1317 | (insn @var{n2} @var{prev} @var{n} | |
1318 | (set (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 6)) | |
1319 | @dots{}) | |
1320 | ||
1321 | (insn @var{n} @var{n2} @var{next} | |
1322 | (set (reg:SI 3) | |
1323 | (plus:SI (reg:SI 3) (reg:SI 109))) | |
1324 | @dots{}) | |
1325 | @end smallexample | |
1326 | ||
1327 | It is up to you to make sure that each operand, in each pattern, has | |
1328 | constraints that can handle any RTL expression that could be present for | |
1329 | that operand. (When multiple alternatives are in use, each pattern must, | |
1330 | for each possible combination of operand expressions, have at least one | |
1331 | alternative which can handle that combination of operands.) The | |
1332 | constraints don't need to @emph{allow} any possible operand---when this is | |
1333 | the case, they do not constrain---but they must at least point the way to | |
1334 | reloading any possible operand so that it will fit. | |
1335 | ||
1336 | @itemize @bullet | |
1337 | @item | |
1338 | If the constraint accepts whatever operands the predicate permits, | |
1339 | there is no problem: reloading is never necessary for this operand. | |
1340 | ||
1341 | For example, an operand whose constraints permit everything except | |
1342 | registers is safe provided its predicate rejects registers. | |
1343 | ||
1344 | An operand whose predicate accepts only constant values is safe | |
1345 | provided its constraints include the letter @samp{i}. If any possible | |
1346 | constant value is accepted, then nothing less than @samp{i} will do; | |
1347 | if the predicate is more selective, then the constraints may also be | |
1348 | more selective. | |
1349 | ||
1350 | @item | |
1351 | Any operand expression can be reloaded by copying it into a register. | |
1352 | So if an operand's constraints allow some kind of register, it is | |
1353 | certain to be safe. It need not permit all classes of registers; the | |
1354 | compiler knows how to copy a register into another register of the | |
1355 | proper class in order to make an instruction valid. | |
1356 | ||
1357 | @cindex nonoffsettable memory reference | |
1358 | @cindex memory reference, nonoffsettable | |
1359 | @item | |
1360 | A nonoffsettable memory reference can be reloaded by copying the | |
1361 | address into a register. So if the constraint uses the letter | |
1362 | @samp{o}, all memory references are taken care of. | |
1363 | ||
1364 | @item | |
1365 | A constant operand can be reloaded by allocating space in memory to | |
1366 | hold it as preinitialized data. Then the memory reference can be used | |
1367 | in place of the constant. So if the constraint uses the letters | |
1368 | @samp{o} or @samp{m}, constant operands are not a problem. | |
1369 | ||
1370 | @item | |
1371 | If the constraint permits a constant and a pseudo register used in an insn | |
1372 | was not allocated to a hard register and is equivalent to a constant, | |
1373 | the register will be replaced with the constant. If the predicate does | |
1374 | not permit a constant and the insn is re-recognized for some reason, the | |
1375 | compiler will crash. Thus the predicate must always recognize any | |
1376 | objects allowed by the constraint. | |
1377 | @end itemize | |
1378 | ||
1379 | If the operand's predicate can recognize registers, but the constraint does | |
1380 | not permit them, it can make the compiler crash. When this operand happens | |
1381 | to be a register, the reload pass will be stymied, because it does not know | |
1382 | how to copy a register temporarily into memory. | |
1383 | ||
1384 | If the predicate accepts a unary operator, the constraint applies to the | |
1385 | operand. For example, the MIPS processor at ISA level 3 supports an | |
1386 | instruction which adds two registers in @code{SImode} to produce a | |
1387 | @code{DImode} result, but only if the registers are correctly sign | |
1388 | extended. This predicate for the input operands accepts a | |
1389 | @code{sign_extend} of an @code{SImode} register. Write the constraint | |
1390 | to indicate the type of register that is required for the operand of the | |
1391 | @code{sign_extend}. | |
1392 | @end ifset | |
1393 | ||
1394 | @node Multi-Alternative | |
1395 | @subsection Multiple Alternative Constraints | |
1396 | @cindex multiple alternative constraints | |
1397 | ||
1398 | Sometimes a single instruction has multiple alternative sets of possible | |
1399 | operands. For example, on the 68000, a logical-or instruction can combine | |
1400 | register or an immediate value into memory, or it can combine any kind of | |
1401 | operand into a register; but it cannot combine one memory location into | |
1402 | another. | |
1403 | ||
1404 | These constraints are represented as multiple alternatives. An alternative | |
1405 | can be described by a series of letters for each operand. The overall | |
1406 | constraint for an operand is made from the letters for this operand | |
1407 | from the first alternative, a comma, the letters for this operand from | |
1408 | the second alternative, a comma, and so on until the last alternative. | |
1409 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1410 | Here is how it is done for fullword logical-or on the 68000: | |
1411 | ||
1412 | @smallexample | |
1413 | (define_insn "iorsi3" | |
1414 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=m,d") | |
1415 | (ior:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0") | |
1416 | (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dKs,dmKs")))] | |
1417 | @dots{}) | |
1418 | @end smallexample | |
1419 | ||
1420 | The first alternative has @samp{m} (memory) for operand 0, @samp{0} for | |
1421 | operand 1 (meaning it must match operand 0), and @samp{dKs} for operand | |
1422 | 2. The second alternative has @samp{d} (data register) for operand 0, | |
1423 | @samp{0} for operand 1, and @samp{dmKs} for operand 2. The @samp{=} and | |
1424 | @samp{%} in the constraints apply to all the alternatives; their | |
1425 | meaning is explained in the next section (@pxref{Class Preferences}). | |
1426 | @end ifset | |
1427 | ||
1428 | @c FIXME Is this ? and ! stuff of use in asm()? If not, hide unless INTERNAL | |
1429 | If all the operands fit any one alternative, the instruction is valid. | |
1430 | Otherwise, for each alternative, the compiler counts how many instructions | |
1431 | must be added to copy the operands so that that alternative applies. | |
1432 | The alternative requiring the least copying is chosen. If two alternatives | |
1433 | need the same amount of copying, the one that comes first is chosen. | |
1434 | These choices can be altered with the @samp{?} and @samp{!} characters: | |
1435 | ||
1436 | @table @code | |
1437 | @cindex @samp{?} in constraint | |
1438 | @cindex question mark | |
1439 | @item ? | |
1440 | Disparage slightly the alternative that the @samp{?} appears in, | |
1441 | as a choice when no alternative applies exactly. The compiler regards | |
1442 | this alternative as one unit more costly for each @samp{?} that appears | |
1443 | in it. | |
1444 | ||
1445 | @cindex @samp{!} in constraint | |
1446 | @cindex exclamation point | |
1447 | @item ! | |
1448 | Disparage severely the alternative that the @samp{!} appears in. | |
1449 | This alternative can still be used if it fits without reloading, | |
1450 | but if reloading is needed, some other alternative will be used. | |
1451 | @end table | |
1452 | ||
1453 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1454 | When an insn pattern has multiple alternatives in its constraints, often | |
1455 | the appearance of the assembler code is determined mostly by which | |
1456 | alternative was matched. When this is so, the C code for writing the | |
1457 | assembler code can use the variable @code{which_alternative}, which is | |
1458 | the ordinal number of the alternative that was actually satisfied (0 for | |
1459 | the first, 1 for the second alternative, etc.). @xref{Output Statement}. | |
1460 | @end ifset | |
1461 | ||
1462 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1463 | @node Class Preferences | |
1464 | @subsection Register Class Preferences | |
1465 | @cindex class preference constraints | |
1466 | @cindex register class preference constraints | |
1467 | ||
1468 | @cindex voting between constraint alternatives | |
1469 | The operand constraints have another function: they enable the compiler | |
1470 | to decide which kind of hardware register a pseudo register is best | |
1471 | allocated to. The compiler examines the constraints that apply to the | |
1472 | insns that use the pseudo register, looking for the machine-dependent | |
1473 | letters such as @samp{d} and @samp{a} that specify classes of registers. | |
1474 | The pseudo register is put in whichever class gets the most ``votes''. | |
1475 | The constraint letters @samp{g} and @samp{r} also vote: they vote in | |
1476 | favor of a general register. The machine description says which registers | |
1477 | are considered general. | |
1478 | ||
1479 | Of course, on some machines all registers are equivalent, and no register | |
1480 | classes are defined. Then none of this complexity is relevant. | |
1481 | @end ifset | |
1482 | ||
1483 | @node Modifiers | |
1484 | @subsection Constraint Modifier Characters | |
1485 | @cindex modifiers in constraints | |
1486 | @cindex constraint modifier characters | |
1487 | ||
1488 | @c prevent bad page break with this line | |
1489 | Here are constraint modifier characters. | |
1490 | ||
1491 | @table @samp | |
1492 | @cindex @samp{=} in constraint | |
1493 | @item = | |
1494 | Means that this operand is write-only for this instruction: the previous | |
1495 | value is discarded and replaced by output data. | |
1496 | ||
1497 | @cindex @samp{+} in constraint | |
1498 | @item + | |
1499 | Means that this operand is both read and written by the instruction. | |
1500 | ||
1501 | When the compiler fixes up the operands to satisfy the constraints, | |
1502 | it needs to know which operands are inputs to the instruction and | |
1503 | which are outputs from it. @samp{=} identifies an output; @samp{+} | |
1504 | identifies an operand that is both input and output; all other operands | |
1505 | are assumed to be input only. | |
1506 | ||
c5c76735 JL |
1507 | If you specify @samp{=} or @samp{+} in a constraint, you put it in the |
1508 | first character of the constraint string. | |
1509 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1510 | @cindex @samp{&} in constraint |
1511 | @cindex earlyclobber operand | |
1512 | @item & | |
1513 | Means (in a particular alternative) that this operand is an | |
1514 | @dfn{earlyclobber} operand, which is modified before the instruction is | |
1515 | finished using the input operands. Therefore, this operand may not lie | |
1516 | in a register that is used as an input operand or as part of any memory | |
1517 | address. | |
1518 | ||
1519 | @samp{&} applies only to the alternative in which it is written. In | |
1520 | constraints with multiple alternatives, sometimes one alternative | |
1521 | requires @samp{&} while others do not. See, for example, the | |
1522 | @samp{movdf} insn of the 68000. | |
1523 | ||
ebb48a4d | 1524 | An input operand can be tied to an earlyclobber operand if its only |
03dda8e3 RK |
1525 | use as an input occurs before the early result is written. Adding |
1526 | alternatives of this form often allows GCC to produce better code | |
ebb48a4d | 1527 | when only some of the inputs can be affected by the earlyclobber. |
161d7b59 | 1528 | See, for example, the @samp{mulsi3} insn of the ARM@. |
03dda8e3 RK |
1529 | |
1530 | @samp{&} does not obviate the need to write @samp{=}. | |
1531 | ||
1532 | @cindex @samp{%} in constraint | |
1533 | @item % | |
1534 | Declares the instruction to be commutative for this operand and the | |
1535 | following operand. This means that the compiler may interchange the | |
1536 | two operands if that is the cheapest way to make all operands fit the | |
1537 | constraints. | |
1538 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
1539 | This is often used in patterns for addition instructions | |
1540 | that really have only two operands: the result must go in one of the | |
1541 | arguments. Here for example, is how the 68000 halfword-add | |
1542 | instruction is defined: | |
1543 | ||
1544 | @smallexample | |
1545 | (define_insn "addhi3" | |
1546 | [(set (match_operand:HI 0 "general_operand" "=m,r") | |
1547 | (plus:HI (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "%0,0") | |
1548 | (match_operand:HI 2 "general_operand" "di,g")))] | |
1549 | @dots{}) | |
1550 | @end smallexample | |
1551 | @end ifset | |
daf2f129 | 1552 | GCC can only handle one commutative pair in an asm; if you use more, |
595163db EB |
1553 | the compiler may fail. Note that you need not use the modifier if |
1554 | the two alternatives are strictly identical; this would only waste | |
1555 | time in the reload pass. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
1556 | |
1557 | @cindex @samp{#} in constraint | |
1558 | @item # | |
1559 | Says that all following characters, up to the next comma, are to be | |
1560 | ignored as a constraint. They are significant only for choosing | |
1561 | register preferences. | |
1562 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1563 | @cindex @samp{*} in constraint |
1564 | @item * | |
1565 | Says that the following character should be ignored when choosing | |
1566 | register preferences. @samp{*} has no effect on the meaning of the | |
1567 | constraint as a constraint, and no effect on reloading. | |
1568 | ||
9f339dde | 1569 | @ifset INTERNALS |
03dda8e3 RK |
1570 | Here is an example: the 68000 has an instruction to sign-extend a |
1571 | halfword in a data register, and can also sign-extend a value by | |
1572 | copying it into an address register. While either kind of register is | |
1573 | acceptable, the constraints on an address-register destination are | |
1574 | less strict, so it is best if register allocation makes an address | |
1575 | register its goal. Therefore, @samp{*} is used so that the @samp{d} | |
1576 | constraint letter (for data register) is ignored when computing | |
1577 | register preferences. | |
1578 | ||
1579 | @smallexample | |
1580 | (define_insn "extendhisi2" | |
1581 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=*d,a") | |
1582 | (sign_extend:SI | |
1583 | (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" "0,g")))] | |
1584 | @dots{}) | |
1585 | @end smallexample | |
1586 | @end ifset | |
1587 | @end table | |
1588 | ||
1589 | @node Machine Constraints | |
1590 | @subsection Constraints for Particular Machines | |
1591 | @cindex machine specific constraints | |
1592 | @cindex constraints, machine specific | |
1593 | ||
1594 | Whenever possible, you should use the general-purpose constraint letters | |
1595 | in @code{asm} arguments, since they will convey meaning more readily to | |
1596 | people reading your code. Failing that, use the constraint letters | |
1597 | that usually have very similar meanings across architectures. The most | |
1598 | commonly used constraints are @samp{m} and @samp{r} (for memory and | |
1599 | general-purpose registers respectively; @pxref{Simple Constraints}), and | |
1600 | @samp{I}, usually the letter indicating the most common | |
1601 | immediate-constant format. | |
1602 | ||
9c34dbbf ZW |
1603 | For each machine architecture, the |
1604 | @file{config/@var{machine}/@var{machine}.h} file defines additional | |
1605 | constraints. These constraints are used by the compiler itself for | |
1606 | instruction generation, as well as for @code{asm} statements; therefore, | |
1607 | some of the constraints are not particularly interesting for @code{asm}. | |
1608 | The constraints are defined through these macros: | |
03dda8e3 RK |
1609 | |
1610 | @table @code | |
1611 | @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER | |
4bd0bee9 | 1612 | Register class constraints (usually lowercase). |
03dda8e3 RK |
1613 | |
1614 | @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P | |
1615 | Immediate constant constraints, for non-floating point constants of | |
4bd0bee9 | 1616 | word size or smaller precision (usually uppercase). |
03dda8e3 RK |
1617 | |
1618 | @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P | |
1619 | Immediate constant constraints, for all floating point constants and for | |
4bd0bee9 | 1620 | constants of greater than word size precision (usually uppercase). |
03dda8e3 RK |
1621 | |
1622 | @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT | |
1623 | Special cases of registers or memory. This macro is not required, and | |
1624 | is only defined for some machines. | |
1625 | @end table | |
1626 | ||
1627 | Inspecting these macro definitions in the compiler source for your | |
1628 | machine is the best way to be certain you have the right constraints. | |
1629 | However, here is a summary of the machine-dependent constraints | |
1630 | available on some particular machines. | |
1631 | ||
1632 | @table @emph | |
1633 | @item ARM family---@file{arm.h} | |
1634 | @table @code | |
1635 | @item f | |
1636 | Floating-point register | |
1637 | ||
9b66ebb1 PB |
1638 | @item w |
1639 | VFP floating-point register | |
1640 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1641 | @item F |
1642 | One of the floating-point constants 0.0, 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0 | |
1643 | or 10.0 | |
1644 | ||
1645 | @item G | |
1646 | Floating-point constant that would satisfy the constraint @samp{F} if it | |
1647 | were negated | |
1648 | ||
1649 | @item I | |
1650 | Integer that is valid as an immediate operand in a data processing | |
1651 | instruction. That is, an integer in the range 0 to 255 rotated by a | |
1652 | multiple of 2 | |
1653 | ||
1654 | @item J | |
630d3d5a | 1655 | Integer in the range @minus{}4095 to 4095 |
03dda8e3 RK |
1656 | |
1657 | @item K | |
1658 | Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when inverted (ones complement) | |
1659 | ||
1660 | @item L | |
1661 | Integer that satisfies constraint @samp{I} when negated (twos complement) | |
1662 | ||
1663 | @item M | |
1664 | Integer in the range 0 to 32 | |
1665 | ||
1666 | @item Q | |
1667 | A memory reference where the exact address is in a single register | |
1668 | (`@samp{m}' is preferable for @code{asm} statements) | |
1669 | ||
1670 | @item R | |
1671 | An item in the constant pool | |
1672 | ||
1673 | @item S | |
1674 | A symbol in the text segment of the current file | |
1675 | @end table | |
1676 | ||
1e1ab407 | 1677 | @item Uv |
9b66ebb1 PB |
1678 | A memory reference suitable for VFP load/store insns (reg+constant offset) |
1679 | ||
fdd695fd PB |
1680 | @item Uy |
1681 | A memory reference suitable for iWMMXt load/store instructions. | |
1682 | ||
1e1ab407 | 1683 | @item Uq |
0bdcd332 | 1684 | A memory reference suitable for the ARMv4 ldrsb instruction. |
1e1ab407 | 1685 | |
052a4b28 DC |
1686 | @item AVR family---@file{avr.h} |
1687 | @table @code | |
1688 | @item l | |
1689 | Registers from r0 to r15 | |
1690 | ||
1691 | @item a | |
1692 | Registers from r16 to r23 | |
1693 | ||
1694 | @item d | |
1695 | Registers from r16 to r31 | |
1696 | ||
1697 | @item w | |
3a69a7d5 | 1698 | Registers from r24 to r31. These registers can be used in @samp{adiw} command |
052a4b28 DC |
1699 | |
1700 | @item e | |
d7d9c429 | 1701 | Pointer register (r26--r31) |
052a4b28 DC |
1702 | |
1703 | @item b | |
d7d9c429 | 1704 | Base pointer register (r28--r31) |
052a4b28 | 1705 | |
3a69a7d5 MM |
1706 | @item q |
1707 | Stack pointer register (SPH:SPL) | |
1708 | ||
052a4b28 DC |
1709 | @item t |
1710 | Temporary register r0 | |
1711 | ||
1712 | @item x | |
1713 | Register pair X (r27:r26) | |
1714 | ||
1715 | @item y | |
1716 | Register pair Y (r29:r28) | |
1717 | ||
1718 | @item z | |
1719 | Register pair Z (r31:r30) | |
1720 | ||
1721 | @item I | |
630d3d5a | 1722 | Constant greater than @minus{}1, less than 64 |
052a4b28 DC |
1723 | |
1724 | @item J | |
630d3d5a | 1725 | Constant greater than @minus{}64, less than 1 |
052a4b28 DC |
1726 | |
1727 | @item K | |
1728 | Constant integer 2 | |
1729 | ||
1730 | @item L | |
1731 | Constant integer 0 | |
1732 | ||
1733 | @item M | |
1734 | Constant that fits in 8 bits | |
1735 | ||
1736 | @item N | |
630d3d5a | 1737 | Constant integer @minus{}1 |
052a4b28 DC |
1738 | |
1739 | @item O | |
3a69a7d5 | 1740 | Constant integer 8, 16, or 24 |
052a4b28 DC |
1741 | |
1742 | @item P | |
1743 | Constant integer 1 | |
1744 | ||
1745 | @item G | |
1746 | A floating point constant 0.0 | |
1747 | @end table | |
1748 | ||
2dcfc29d | 1749 | @item PowerPC and IBM RS6000---@file{rs6000.h} |
03dda8e3 RK |
1750 | @table @code |
1751 | @item b | |
1752 | Address base register | |
1753 | ||
1754 | @item f | |
1755 | Floating point register | |
1756 | ||
2dcfc29d DE |
1757 | @item v |
1758 | Vector register | |
1759 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1760 | @item h |
1761 | @samp{MQ}, @samp{CTR}, or @samp{LINK} register | |
1762 | ||
1763 | @item q | |
1764 | @samp{MQ} register | |
1765 | ||
1766 | @item c | |
1767 | @samp{CTR} register | |
1768 | ||
1769 | @item l | |
1770 | @samp{LINK} register | |
1771 | ||
1772 | @item x | |
1773 | @samp{CR} register (condition register) number 0 | |
1774 | ||
1775 | @item y | |
1776 | @samp{CR} register (condition register) | |
1777 | ||
8f685459 DE |
1778 | @item z |
1779 | @samp{FPMEM} stack memory for FPR-GPR transfers | |
1780 | ||
03dda8e3 | 1781 | @item I |
1e5f973d | 1782 | Signed 16-bit constant |
03dda8e3 RK |
1783 | |
1784 | @item J | |
ebb48a4d | 1785 | Unsigned 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits (use @samp{L} instead for |
5f59ecb7 | 1786 | @code{SImode} constants) |
03dda8e3 RK |
1787 | |
1788 | @item K | |
1e5f973d | 1789 | Unsigned 16-bit constant |
03dda8e3 RK |
1790 | |
1791 | @item L | |
1e5f973d | 1792 | Signed 16-bit constant shifted left 16 bits |
03dda8e3 RK |
1793 | |
1794 | @item M | |
1795 | Constant larger than 31 | |
1796 | ||
1797 | @item N | |
1798 | Exact power of 2 | |
1799 | ||
1800 | @item O | |
1801 | Zero | |
1802 | ||
1803 | @item P | |
1e5f973d | 1804 | Constant whose negation is a signed 16-bit constant |
03dda8e3 RK |
1805 | |
1806 | @item G | |
1807 | Floating point constant that can be loaded into a register with one | |
1808 | instruction per word | |
1809 | ||
1810 | @item Q | |
1811 | Memory operand that is an offset from a register (@samp{m} is preferable | |
1812 | for @code{asm} statements) | |
1813 | ||
1814 | @item R | |
1815 | AIX TOC entry | |
1816 | ||
1817 | @item S | |
8f685459 | 1818 | Constant suitable as a 64-bit mask operand |
03dda8e3 | 1819 | |
5f59ecb7 DE |
1820 | @item T |
1821 | Constant suitable as a 32-bit mask operand | |
1822 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1823 | @item U |
1824 | System V Release 4 small data area reference | |
1825 | @end table | |
1826 | ||
1827 | @item Intel 386---@file{i386.h} | |
1828 | @table @code | |
1829 | @item q | |
0c56474e | 1830 | @samp{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, or @code{d} register for the i386. |
8a36672b JM |
1831 | For x86-64 it is equivalent to @samp{r} class (for 8-bit instructions that |
1832 | do not use upper halves). | |
0c56474e JH |
1833 | |
1834 | @item Q | |
8a36672b JM |
1835 | @samp{a}, @code{b}, @code{c}, or @code{d} register (for 8-bit instructions, |
1836 | that do use upper halves). | |
0c56474e JH |
1837 | |
1838 | @item R | |
d7d9c429 | 1839 | Legacy register---equivalent to @code{r} class in i386 mode. |
1e5f973d | 1840 | (for non-8-bit registers used together with 8-bit upper halves in a single |
0c56474e | 1841 | instruction) |
03dda8e3 RK |
1842 | |
1843 | @item A | |
994682b9 AJ |
1844 | Specifies the @samp{a} or @samp{d} registers. This is primarily useful |
1845 | for 64-bit integer values (when in 32-bit mode) intended to be returned | |
1846 | with the @samp{d} register holding the most significant bits and the | |
1847 | @samp{a} register holding the least significant bits. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
1848 | |
1849 | @item f | |
1850 | Floating point register | |
1851 | ||
1852 | @item t | |
1853 | First (top of stack) floating point register | |
1854 | ||
1855 | @item u | |
1856 | Second floating point register | |
1857 | ||
1858 | @item a | |
1859 | @samp{a} register | |
1860 | ||
1861 | @item b | |
1862 | @samp{b} register | |
1863 | ||
1864 | @item c | |
1865 | @samp{c} register | |
1866 | ||
f8ca7923 | 1867 | @item C |
c0478a66 | 1868 | Specifies constant that can be easily constructed in SSE register without |
f8ca7923 JH |
1869 | loading it from memory. |
1870 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
1871 | @item d |
1872 | @samp{d} register | |
1873 | ||
1874 | @item D | |
1875 | @samp{di} register | |
1876 | ||
1877 | @item S | |
1878 | @samp{si} register | |
1879 | ||
994682b9 AJ |
1880 | @item x |
1881 | @samp{xmm} SSE register | |
1882 | ||
1883 | @item y | |
1884 | MMX register | |
1885 | ||
03dda8e3 | 1886 | @item I |
1e5f973d | 1887 | Constant in range 0 to 31 (for 32-bit shifts) |
03dda8e3 RK |
1888 | |
1889 | @item J | |
1e5f973d | 1890 | Constant in range 0 to 63 (for 64-bit shifts) |
03dda8e3 RK |
1891 | |
1892 | @item K | |
1893 | @samp{0xff} | |
1894 | ||
1895 | @item L | |
1896 | @samp{0xffff} | |
1897 | ||
1898 | @item M | |
1899 | 0, 1, 2, or 3 (shifts for @code{lea} instruction) | |
1900 | ||
1901 | @item N | |
1902 | Constant in range 0 to 255 (for @code{out} instruction) | |
1903 | ||
0c56474e | 1904 | @item Z |
aee96fe9 | 1905 | Constant in range 0 to @code{0xffffffff} or symbolic reference known to fit specified range. |
1e5f973d | 1906 | (for using immediates in zero extending 32-bit to 64-bit x86-64 instructions) |
0c56474e JH |
1907 | |
1908 | @item e | |
630d3d5a | 1909 | Constant in range @minus{}2147483648 to 2147483647 or symbolic reference known to fit specified range. |
1e5f973d | 1910 | (for using immediates in 64-bit x86-64 instructions) |
0c56474e | 1911 | |
03dda8e3 RK |
1912 | @item G |
1913 | Standard 80387 floating point constant | |
1914 | @end table | |
1915 | ||
7a430e3b SC |
1916 | @item Intel IA-64---@file{ia64.h} |
1917 | @table @code | |
1918 | @item a | |
1919 | General register @code{r0} to @code{r3} for @code{addl} instruction | |
1920 | ||
1921 | @item b | |
1922 | Branch register | |
1923 | ||
1924 | @item c | |
1925 | Predicate register (@samp{c} as in ``conditional'') | |
1926 | ||
1927 | @item d | |
1928 | Application register residing in M-unit | |
1929 | ||
1930 | @item e | |
1931 | Application register residing in I-unit | |
1932 | ||
1933 | @item f | |
1934 | Floating-point register | |
1935 | ||
1936 | @item m | |
1937 | Memory operand. | |
1938 | Remember that @samp{m} allows postincrement and postdecrement which | |
1939 | require printing with @samp{%Pn} on IA-64. | |
1940 | Use @samp{S} to disallow postincrement and postdecrement. | |
1941 | ||
1942 | @item G | |
1943 | Floating-point constant 0.0 or 1.0 | |
1944 | ||
1945 | @item I | |
1946 | 14-bit signed integer constant | |
1947 | ||
1948 | @item J | |
1949 | 22-bit signed integer constant | |
1950 | ||
1951 | @item K | |
1952 | 8-bit signed integer constant for logical instructions | |
1953 | ||
1954 | @item L | |
1955 | 8-bit adjusted signed integer constant for compare pseudo-ops | |
1956 | ||
1957 | @item M | |
1958 | 6-bit unsigned integer constant for shift counts | |
1959 | ||
1960 | @item N | |
1961 | 9-bit signed integer constant for load and store postincrements | |
1962 | ||
1963 | @item O | |
1964 | The constant zero | |
1965 | ||
1966 | @item P | |
78466c0e | 1967 | 0 or @minus{}1 for @code{dep} instruction |
7a430e3b SC |
1968 | |
1969 | @item Q | |
1970 | Non-volatile memory for floating-point loads and stores | |
1971 | ||
1972 | @item R | |
1973 | Integer constant in the range 1 to 4 for @code{shladd} instruction | |
1974 | ||
1975 | @item S | |
1976 | Memory operand except postincrement and postdecrement | |
1977 | @end table | |
03dda8e3 | 1978 | |
70899148 BS |
1979 | @item FRV---@file{frv.h} |
1980 | @table @code | |
1981 | @item a | |
840758d3 | 1982 | Register in the class @code{ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}). |
70899148 BS |
1983 | |
1984 | @item b | |
840758d3 | 1985 | Register in the class @code{EVEN_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}). |
70899148 BS |
1986 | |
1987 | @item c | |
840758d3 BS |
1988 | Register in the class @code{CC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3} and |
1989 | @code{icc0} to @code{icc3}). | |
70899148 BS |
1990 | |
1991 | @item d | |
840758d3 | 1992 | Register in the class @code{GPR_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}). |
70899148 BS |
1993 | |
1994 | @item e | |
840758d3 | 1995 | Register in the class @code{EVEN_REGS} (@code{gr0} to @code{gr63}). |
70899148 BS |
1996 | Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine |
1997 | mode larger than 4 bytes. | |
1998 | ||
1999 | @item f | |
840758d3 | 2000 | Register in the class @code{FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}). |
70899148 BS |
2001 | |
2002 | @item h | |
840758d3 | 2003 | Register in the class @code{FEVEN_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}). |
70899148 BS |
2004 | Odd registers are excluded not in the class but through the use of a machine |
2005 | mode larger than 4 bytes. | |
2006 | ||
2007 | @item l | |
840758d3 | 2008 | Register in the class @code{LR_REG} (the @code{lr} register). |
70899148 BS |
2009 | |
2010 | @item q | |
840758d3 | 2011 | Register in the class @code{QUAD_REGS} (@code{gr2} to @code{gr63}). |
70899148 BS |
2012 | Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through |
2013 | the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes. | |
2014 | ||
2015 | @item t | |
840758d3 | 2016 | Register in the class @code{ICC_REGS} (@code{icc0} to @code{icc3}). |
70899148 BS |
2017 | |
2018 | @item u | |
840758d3 | 2019 | Register in the class @code{FCC_REGS} (@code{fcc0} to @code{fcc3}). |
70899148 BS |
2020 | |
2021 | @item v | |
840758d3 | 2022 | Register in the class @code{ICR_REGS} (@code{cc4} to @code{cc7}). |
70899148 BS |
2023 | |
2024 | @item w | |
840758d3 | 2025 | Register in the class @code{FCR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc3}). |
70899148 BS |
2026 | |
2027 | @item x | |
840758d3 | 2028 | Register in the class @code{QUAD_FPR_REGS} (@code{fr0} to @code{fr63}). |
70899148 BS |
2029 | Register numbers not divisible by 4 are excluded not in the class but through |
2030 | the use of a machine mode larger than 8 bytes. | |
2031 | ||
2032 | @item z | |
840758d3 | 2033 | Register in the class @code{SPR_REGS} (@code{lcr} and @code{lr}). |
70899148 BS |
2034 | |
2035 | @item A | |
840758d3 | 2036 | Register in the class @code{QUAD_ACC_REGS} (@code{acc0} to @code{acc7}). |
70899148 BS |
2037 | |
2038 | @item B | |
840758d3 | 2039 | Register in the class @code{ACCG_REGS} (@code{accg0} to @code{accg7}). |
70899148 BS |
2040 | |
2041 | @item C | |
840758d3 | 2042 | Register in the class @code{CR_REGS} (@code{cc0} to @code{cc7}). |
70899148 BS |
2043 | |
2044 | @item G | |
2045 | Floating point constant zero | |
2046 | ||
2047 | @item I | |
2048 | 6-bit signed integer constant | |
2049 | ||
2050 | @item J | |
2051 | 10-bit signed integer constant | |
2052 | ||
2053 | @item L | |
2054 | 16-bit signed integer constant | |
2055 | ||
2056 | @item M | |
2057 | 16-bit unsigned integer constant | |
2058 | ||
2059 | @item N | |
840758d3 BS |
2060 | 12-bit signed integer constant that is negative---i.e.@: in the |
2061 | range of @minus{}2048 to @minus{}1 | |
70899148 BS |
2062 | |
2063 | @item O | |
2064 | Constant zero | |
2065 | ||
2066 | @item P | |
840758d3 | 2067 | 12-bit signed integer constant that is greater than zero---i.e.@: in the |
70899148 BS |
2068 | range of 1 to 2047. |
2069 | ||
2070 | @end table | |
2071 | ||
0d4a78eb BS |
2072 | @item Blackfin family---@file{bfin.h} |
2073 | @table @code | |
2074 | @item a | |
2075 | P register | |
2076 | ||
2077 | @item d | |
2078 | D register | |
2079 | ||
2080 | @item z | |
2081 | A call clobbered P register. | |
2082 | ||
2083 | @item D | |
2084 | Even-numbered D register | |
2085 | ||
2086 | @item W | |
2087 | Odd-numbered D register | |
2088 | ||
2089 | @item e | |
2090 | Accumulator register. | |
2091 | ||
2092 | @item A | |
2093 | Even-numbered accumulator register. | |
2094 | ||
2095 | @item B | |
2096 | Odd-numbered accumulator register. | |
2097 | ||
2098 | @item b | |
2099 | I register | |
2100 | ||
2101 | @item B | |
2102 | B register | |
2103 | ||
2104 | @item f | |
2105 | M register | |
2106 | ||
2107 | @item c | |
2108 | Registers used for circular buffering, i.e. I, B, or L registers. | |
2109 | ||
2110 | @item C | |
2111 | The CC register. | |
2112 | ||
2113 | @item x | |
2114 | Any D, P, B, M, I or L register. | |
2115 | ||
2116 | @item y | |
2117 | Additional registers typically used only in prologues and epilogues: RETS, | |
2118 | RETN, RETI, RETX, RETE, ASTAT, SEQSTAT and USP. | |
2119 | ||
2120 | @item w | |
2121 | Any register except accumulators or CC. | |
2122 | ||
2123 | @item Ksh | |
2124 | Signed 16 bit integer (in the range -32768 to 32767) | |
2125 | ||
2126 | @item Kuh | |
2127 | Unsigned 16 bit integer (in the range 0 to 65535) | |
2128 | ||
2129 | @item Ks7 | |
2130 | Signed 7 bit integer (in the range -64 to 63) | |
2131 | ||
2132 | @item Ku7 | |
2133 | Unsigned 7 bit integer (in the range 0 to 127) | |
2134 | ||
2135 | @item Ku5 | |
2136 | Unsigned 5 bit integer (in the range 0 to 31) | |
2137 | ||
2138 | @item Ks4 | |
2139 | Signed 4 bit integer (in the range -8 to 7) | |
2140 | ||
2141 | @item Ks3 | |
2142 | Signed 3 bit integer (in the range -3 to 4) | |
2143 | ||
2144 | @item Ku3 | |
2145 | Unsigned 3 bit integer (in the range 0 to 7) | |
2146 | ||
2147 | @item P@var{n} | |
2148 | Constant @var{n}, where @var{n} is a single-digit constant in the range 0 to 4. | |
2149 | ||
2150 | @item M1 | |
2151 | Constant 255. | |
2152 | ||
2153 | @item M2 | |
2154 | Constant 65535. | |
2155 | ||
2156 | @item J | |
2157 | An integer constant with exactly a single bit set. | |
2158 | ||
2159 | @item L | |
2160 | An integer constant with all bits set except exactly one. | |
2161 | ||
2162 | @item H | |
2163 | ||
2164 | @item Q | |
2165 | Any SYMBOL_REF. | |
2166 | @end table | |
2167 | ||
e3223ea2 DC |
2168 | @item IP2K---@file{ip2k.h} |
2169 | @table @code | |
2170 | @item a | |
2171 | @samp{DP} or @samp{IP} registers (general address) | |
2172 | ||
2173 | @item f | |
2174 | @samp{IP} register | |
2175 | ||
2176 | @item j | |
2177 | @samp{IPL} register | |
2178 | ||
2179 | @item k | |
2180 | @samp{IPH} register | |
2181 | ||
2182 | @item b | |
2183 | @samp{DP} register | |
2184 | ||
2185 | @item y | |
2186 | @samp{DPH} register | |
2187 | ||
2188 | @item z | |
2189 | @samp{DPL} register | |
2190 | ||
2191 | @item q | |
2192 | @samp{SP} register | |
2193 | ||
2194 | @item c | |
2195 | @samp{DP} or @samp{SP} registers (offsettable address) | |
2196 | ||
2197 | @item d | |
2198 | Non-pointer registers (not @samp{SP}, @samp{DP}, @samp{IP}) | |
2199 | ||
2200 | @item u | |
2201 | Non-SP registers (everything except @samp{SP}) | |
2202 | ||
2203 | @item R | |
78466c0e | 2204 | Indirect through @samp{IP}---Avoid this except for @code{QImode}, since we |
e3223ea2 DC |
2205 | can't access extra bytes |
2206 | ||
2207 | @item S | |
95ea367d | 2208 | Indirect through @samp{SP} or @samp{DP} with short displacement (0..127) |
e3223ea2 DC |
2209 | |
2210 | @item T | |
2211 | Data-section immediate value | |
2212 | ||
2213 | @item I | |
2214 | Integers from @minus{}255 to @minus{}1 | |
2215 | ||
2216 | @item J | |
2217 | Integers from 0 to 7---valid bit number in a register | |
2218 | ||
2219 | @item K | |
2220 | Integers from 0 to 127---valid displacement for addressing mode | |
2221 | ||
2222 | @item L | |
2223 | Integers from 1 to 127 | |
2224 | ||
2225 | @item M | |
2226 | Integer @minus{}1 | |
2227 | ||
2228 | @item N | |
2229 | Integer 1 | |
2230 | ||
2231 | @item O | |
2232 | Zero | |
2233 | ||
2234 | @item P | |
2235 | Integers from 0 to 255 | |
2236 | @end table | |
2237 | ||
4226378a PK |
2238 | @item MIPS---@file{mips.h} |
2239 | @table @code | |
2240 | @item d | |
2241 | General-purpose integer register | |
2242 | ||
2243 | @item f | |
2244 | Floating-point register (if available) | |
2245 | ||
2246 | @item h | |
2247 | @samp{Hi} register | |
2248 | ||
2249 | @item l | |
2250 | @samp{Lo} register | |
2251 | ||
2252 | @item x | |
2253 | @samp{Hi} or @samp{Lo} register | |
2254 | ||
2255 | @item y | |
2256 | General-purpose integer register | |
2257 | ||
2258 | @item z | |
2259 | Floating-point status register | |
2260 | ||
2261 | @item I | |
2262 | Signed 16-bit constant (for arithmetic instructions) | |
2263 | ||
2264 | @item J | |
2265 | Zero | |
2266 | ||
2267 | @item K | |
2268 | Zero-extended 16-bit constant (for logic instructions) | |
2269 | ||
2270 | @item L | |
2271 | Constant with low 16 bits zero (can be loaded with @code{lui}) | |
2272 | ||
2273 | @item M | |
2274 | 32-bit constant which requires two instructions to load (a constant | |
2275 | which is not @samp{I}, @samp{K}, or @samp{L}) | |
2276 | ||
2277 | @item N | |
2278 | Negative 16-bit constant | |
2279 | ||
2280 | @item O | |
2281 | Exact power of two | |
2282 | ||
2283 | @item P | |
2284 | Positive 16-bit constant | |
2285 | ||
2286 | @item G | |
2287 | Floating point zero | |
2288 | ||
2289 | @item Q | |
2290 | Memory reference that can be loaded with more than one instruction | |
2291 | (@samp{m} is preferable for @code{asm} statements) | |
2292 | ||
2293 | @item R | |
2294 | Memory reference that can be loaded with one instruction | |
2295 | (@samp{m} is preferable for @code{asm} statements) | |
2296 | ||
2297 | @item S | |
2298 | Memory reference in external OSF/rose PIC format | |
2299 | (@samp{m} is preferable for @code{asm} statements) | |
2300 | @end table | |
2301 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2302 | @item Motorola 680x0---@file{m68k.h} |
2303 | @table @code | |
2304 | @item a | |
2305 | Address register | |
2306 | ||
2307 | @item d | |
2308 | Data register | |
2309 | ||
2310 | @item f | |
2311 | 68881 floating-point register, if available | |
2312 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2313 | @item I |
2314 | Integer in the range 1 to 8 | |
2315 | ||
2316 | @item J | |
1e5f973d | 2317 | 16-bit signed number |
03dda8e3 RK |
2318 | |
2319 | @item K | |
2320 | Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x80 | |
2321 | ||
2322 | @item L | |
630d3d5a | 2323 | Integer in the range @minus{}8 to @minus{}1 |
03dda8e3 RK |
2324 | |
2325 | @item M | |
2326 | Signed number whose magnitude is greater than 0x100 | |
2327 | ||
2328 | @item G | |
2329 | Floating point constant that is not a 68881 constant | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2330 | @end table |
2331 | ||
2856c3e3 SC |
2332 | @item Motorola 68HC11 & 68HC12 families---@file{m68hc11.h} |
2333 | @table @code | |
2334 | @item a | |
78466c0e | 2335 | Register `a' |
2856c3e3 SC |
2336 | |
2337 | @item b | |
78466c0e | 2338 | Register `b' |
2856c3e3 SC |
2339 | |
2340 | @item d | |
78466c0e | 2341 | Register `d' |
2856c3e3 SC |
2342 | |
2343 | @item q | |
2344 | An 8-bit register | |
2345 | ||
2346 | @item t | |
2347 | Temporary soft register _.tmp | |
2348 | ||
2349 | @item u | |
2350 | A soft register _.d1 to _.d31 | |
2351 | ||
2352 | @item w | |
2353 | Stack pointer register | |
2354 | ||
2355 | @item x | |
78466c0e | 2356 | Register `x' |
2856c3e3 SC |
2357 | |
2358 | @item y | |
78466c0e | 2359 | Register `y' |
2856c3e3 SC |
2360 | |
2361 | @item z | |
78466c0e | 2362 | Pseudo register `z' (replaced by `x' or `y' at the end) |
2856c3e3 SC |
2363 | |
2364 | @item A | |
2365 | An address register: x, y or z | |
2366 | ||
2367 | @item B | |
2368 | An address register: x or y | |
2369 | ||
2370 | @item D | |
2371 | Register pair (x:d) to form a 32-bit value | |
2372 | ||
2373 | @item L | |
630d3d5a | 2374 | Constants in the range @minus{}65536 to 65535 |
2856c3e3 SC |
2375 | |
2376 | @item M | |
2377 | Constants whose 16-bit low part is zero | |
2378 | ||
2379 | @item N | |
630d3d5a | 2380 | Constant integer 1 or @minus{}1 |
2856c3e3 SC |
2381 | |
2382 | @item O | |
2383 | Constant integer 16 | |
2384 | ||
2385 | @item P | |
630d3d5a | 2386 | Constants in the range @minus{}8 to 2 |
2856c3e3 SC |
2387 | |
2388 | @end table | |
2389 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2390 | @need 1000 |
2391 | @item SPARC---@file{sparc.h} | |
2392 | @table @code | |
2393 | @item f | |
53e5f173 EB |
2394 | Floating-point register on the SPARC-V8 architecture and |
2395 | lower floating-point register on the SPARC-V9 architecture. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2396 | |
2397 | @item e | |
8a36672b | 2398 | Floating-point register. It is equivalent to @samp{f} on the |
53e5f173 EB |
2399 | SPARC-V8 architecture and contains both lower and upper |
2400 | floating-point registers on the SPARC-V9 architecture. | |
03dda8e3 | 2401 | |
8a69f99f EB |
2402 | @item c |
2403 | Floating-point condition code register. | |
2404 | ||
2405 | @item d | |
8a36672b | 2406 | Lower floating-point register. It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 |
53e5f173 | 2407 | architecture when the Visual Instruction Set is available. |
8a69f99f EB |
2408 | |
2409 | @item b | |
8a36672b | 2410 | Floating-point register. It is only valid on the SPARC-V9 architecture |
53e5f173 | 2411 | when the Visual Instruction Set is available. |
8a69f99f EB |
2412 | |
2413 | @item h | |
2414 | 64-bit global or out register for the SPARC-V8+ architecture. | |
2415 | ||
03dda8e3 | 2416 | @item I |
1e5f973d | 2417 | Signed 13-bit constant |
03dda8e3 RK |
2418 | |
2419 | @item J | |
2420 | Zero | |
2421 | ||
2422 | @item K | |
1e5f973d | 2423 | 32-bit constant with the low 12 bits clear (a constant that can be |
03dda8e3 RK |
2424 | loaded with the @code{sethi} instruction) |
2425 | ||
7d6040e8 AO |
2426 | @item L |
2427 | A constant in the range supported by @code{movcc} instructions | |
2428 | ||
2429 | @item M | |
2430 | A constant in the range supported by @code{movrcc} instructions | |
2431 | ||
2432 | @item N | |
2433 | Same as @samp{K}, except that it verifies that bits that are not in the | |
57694e40 | 2434 | lower 32-bit range are all zero. Must be used instead of @samp{K} for |
7d6040e8 AO |
2435 | modes wider than @code{SImode} |
2436 | ||
ef0139b1 EB |
2437 | @item O |
2438 | The constant 4096 | |
2439 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2440 | @item G |
2441 | Floating-point zero | |
2442 | ||
2443 | @item H | |
1e5f973d | 2444 | Signed 13-bit constant, sign-extended to 32 or 64 bits |
03dda8e3 RK |
2445 | |
2446 | @item Q | |
62190128 DM |
2447 | Floating-point constant whose integral representation can |
2448 | be moved into an integer register using a single sethi | |
2449 | instruction | |
2450 | ||
2451 | @item R | |
2452 | Floating-point constant whose integral representation can | |
2453 | be moved into an integer register using a single mov | |
2454 | instruction | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2455 | |
2456 | @item S | |
62190128 DM |
2457 | Floating-point constant whose integral representation can |
2458 | be moved into an integer register using a high/lo_sum | |
2459 | instruction sequence | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2460 | |
2461 | @item T | |
2462 | Memory address aligned to an 8-byte boundary | |
2463 | ||
2464 | @item U | |
2465 | Even register | |
6ca30df6 | 2466 | |
7a31a340 | 2467 | @item W |
c75d6010 JM |
2468 | Memory address for @samp{e} constraint registers |
2469 | ||
2470 | @item Y | |
2471 | Vector zero | |
7a31a340 | 2472 | |
6ca30df6 MH |
2473 | @end table |
2474 | ||
2475 | @item TMS320C3x/C4x---@file{c4x.h} | |
2476 | @table @code | |
2477 | @item a | |
2478 | Auxiliary (address) register (ar0-ar7) | |
2479 | ||
2480 | @item b | |
2481 | Stack pointer register (sp) | |
2482 | ||
2483 | @item c | |
1e5f973d | 2484 | Standard (32-bit) precision integer register |
6ca30df6 MH |
2485 | |
2486 | @item f | |
1e5f973d | 2487 | Extended (40-bit) precision register (r0-r11) |
6ca30df6 MH |
2488 | |
2489 | @item k | |
2490 | Block count register (bk) | |
2491 | ||
2492 | @item q | |
1e5f973d | 2493 | Extended (40-bit) precision low register (r0-r7) |
6ca30df6 MH |
2494 | |
2495 | @item t | |
1e5f973d | 2496 | Extended (40-bit) precision register (r0-r1) |
6ca30df6 MH |
2497 | |
2498 | @item u | |
1e5f973d | 2499 | Extended (40-bit) precision register (r2-r3) |
6ca30df6 MH |
2500 | |
2501 | @item v | |
2502 | Repeat count register (rc) | |
2503 | ||
2504 | @item x | |
2505 | Index register (ir0-ir1) | |
2506 | ||
2507 | @item y | |
2508 | Status (condition code) register (st) | |
2509 | ||
2510 | @item z | |
2511 | Data page register (dp) | |
2512 | ||
2513 | @item G | |
2514 | Floating-point zero | |
2515 | ||
2516 | @item H | |
1e5f973d | 2517 | Immediate 16-bit floating-point constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2518 | |
2519 | @item I | |
1e5f973d | 2520 | Signed 16-bit constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2521 | |
2522 | @item J | |
1e5f973d | 2523 | Signed 8-bit constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2524 | |
2525 | @item K | |
1e5f973d | 2526 | Signed 5-bit constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2527 | |
2528 | @item L | |
1e5f973d | 2529 | Unsigned 16-bit constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2530 | |
2531 | @item M | |
1e5f973d | 2532 | Unsigned 8-bit constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2533 | |
2534 | @item N | |
1e5f973d | 2535 | Ones complement of unsigned 16-bit constant |
6ca30df6 MH |
2536 | |
2537 | @item O | |
1e5f973d | 2538 | High 16-bit constant (32-bit constant with 16 LSBs zero) |
6ca30df6 MH |
2539 | |
2540 | @item Q | |
ebb48a4d | 2541 | Indirect memory reference with signed 8-bit or index register displacement |
6ca30df6 MH |
2542 | |
2543 | @item R | |
1e5f973d | 2544 | Indirect memory reference with unsigned 5-bit displacement |
6ca30df6 MH |
2545 | |
2546 | @item S | |
ebb48a4d | 2547 | Indirect memory reference with 1 bit or index register displacement |
6ca30df6 MH |
2548 | |
2549 | @item T | |
2550 | Direct memory reference | |
2551 | ||
2552 | @item U | |
2553 | Symbolic address | |
2554 | ||
03dda8e3 | 2555 | @end table |
91abf72d HP |
2556 | |
2557 | @item S/390 and zSeries---@file{s390.h} | |
2558 | @table @code | |
2559 | @item a | |
2560 | Address register (general purpose register except r0) | |
2561 | ||
9dc62c00 AK |
2562 | @item c |
2563 | Condition code register | |
2564 | ||
91abf72d HP |
2565 | @item d |
2566 | Data register (arbitrary general purpose register) | |
2567 | ||
2568 | @item f | |
2569 | Floating-point register | |
2570 | ||
2571 | @item I | |
2572 | Unsigned 8-bit constant (0--255) | |
2573 | ||
2574 | @item J | |
2575 | Unsigned 12-bit constant (0--4095) | |
2576 | ||
2577 | @item K | |
2578 | Signed 16-bit constant (@minus{}32768--32767) | |
2579 | ||
2580 | @item L | |
f19a9af7 AK |
2581 | Value appropriate as displacement. |
2582 | @table @code | |
2583 | @item (0..4095) | |
2584 | for short displacement | |
2585 | @item (-524288..524287) | |
2586 | for long displacement | |
2587 | @end table | |
2588 | ||
2589 | @item M | |
2590 | Constant integer with a value of 0x7fffffff. | |
2591 | ||
2592 | @item N | |
2593 | Multiple letter constraint followed by 4 parameter letters. | |
2594 | @table @code | |
2595 | @item 0..9: | |
2596 | number of the part counting from most to least significant | |
2597 | @item H,Q: | |
2598 | mode of the part | |
2599 | @item D,S,H: | |
2600 | mode of the containing operand | |
2601 | @item 0,F: | |
78466c0e | 2602 | value of the other parts (F---all bits set) |
f19a9af7 AK |
2603 | @end table |
2604 | The constraint matches if the specified part of a constant | |
2605 | has a value different from it's other parts. | |
91abf72d HP |
2606 | |
2607 | @item Q | |
f19a9af7 AK |
2608 | Memory reference without index register and with short displacement. |
2609 | ||
2610 | @item R | |
2611 | Memory reference with index register and short displacement. | |
91abf72d HP |
2612 | |
2613 | @item S | |
f19a9af7 AK |
2614 | Memory reference without index register but with long displacement. |
2615 | ||
2616 | @item T | |
2617 | Memory reference with index register and long displacement. | |
2618 | ||
2619 | @item U | |
2620 | Pointer with short displacement. | |
2621 | ||
2622 | @item W | |
2623 | Pointer with long displacement. | |
2624 | ||
2625 | @item Y | |
2626 | Shift count operand. | |
91abf72d HP |
2627 | |
2628 | @end table | |
2629 | ||
9f339dde GK |
2630 | @item Xstormy16---@file{stormy16.h} |
2631 | @table @code | |
2632 | @item a | |
2633 | Register r0. | |
2634 | ||
2635 | @item b | |
2636 | Register r1. | |
2637 | ||
2638 | @item c | |
2639 | Register r2. | |
2640 | ||
2641 | @item d | |
2642 | Register r8. | |
2643 | ||
2644 | @item e | |
2645 | Registers r0 through r7. | |
2646 | ||
2647 | @item t | |
2648 | Registers r0 and r1. | |
2649 | ||
2650 | @item y | |
2651 | The carry register. | |
2652 | ||
2653 | @item z | |
2654 | Registers r8 and r9. | |
2655 | ||
2656 | @item I | |
2657 | A constant between 0 and 3 inclusive. | |
2658 | ||
2659 | @item J | |
2660 | A constant that has exactly one bit set. | |
2661 | ||
2662 | @item K | |
2663 | A constant that has exactly one bit clear. | |
2664 | ||
2665 | @item L | |
2666 | A constant between 0 and 255 inclusive. | |
2667 | ||
2668 | @item M | |
69a0611f | 2669 | A constant between @minus{}255 and 0 inclusive. |
9f339dde GK |
2670 | |
2671 | @item N | |
69a0611f | 2672 | A constant between @minus{}3 and 0 inclusive. |
9f339dde GK |
2673 | |
2674 | @item O | |
2675 | A constant between 1 and 4 inclusive. | |
2676 | ||
2677 | @item P | |
69a0611f | 2678 | A constant between @minus{}4 and @minus{}1 inclusive. |
9f339dde GK |
2679 | |
2680 | @item Q | |
2681 | A memory reference that is a stack push. | |
2682 | ||
2683 | @item R | |
2684 | A memory reference that is a stack pop. | |
2685 | ||
2686 | @item S | |
63519d23 | 2687 | A memory reference that refers to a constant address of known value. |
9f339dde GK |
2688 | |
2689 | @item T | |
2690 | The register indicated by Rx (not implemented yet). | |
2691 | ||
2692 | @item U | |
2693 | A constant that is not between 2 and 15 inclusive. | |
2694 | ||
e2ce66a9 DD |
2695 | @item Z |
2696 | The constant 0. | |
2697 | ||
9f339dde GK |
2698 | @end table |
2699 | ||
03984308 BW |
2700 | @item Xtensa---@file{xtensa.h} |
2701 | @table @code | |
2702 | @item a | |
2703 | General-purpose 32-bit register | |
2704 | ||
2705 | @item b | |
2706 | One-bit boolean register | |
2707 | ||
2708 | @item A | |
2709 | MAC16 40-bit accumulator register | |
2710 | ||
2711 | @item I | |
2712 | Signed 12-bit integer constant, for use in MOVI instructions | |
2713 | ||
2714 | @item J | |
2715 | Signed 8-bit integer constant, for use in ADDI instructions | |
2716 | ||
2717 | @item K | |
2718 | Integer constant valid for BccI instructions | |
2719 | ||
2720 | @item L | |
2721 | Unsigned constant valid for BccUI instructions | |
2722 | ||
2723 | @end table | |
2724 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2725 | @end table |
2726 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2727 | @ifset INTERNALS |
2728 | @node Standard Names | |
2729 | @section Standard Pattern Names For Generation | |
2730 | @cindex standard pattern names | |
2731 | @cindex pattern names | |
2732 | @cindex names, pattern | |
2733 | ||
2734 | Here is a table of the instruction names that are meaningful in the RTL | |
2735 | generation pass of the compiler. Giving one of these names to an | |
2736 | instruction pattern tells the RTL generation pass that it can use the | |
556e0f21 | 2737 | pattern to accomplish a certain task. |
03dda8e3 RK |
2738 | |
2739 | @table @asis | |
2740 | @cindex @code{mov@var{m}} instruction pattern | |
2741 | @item @samp{mov@var{m}} | |
4bd0bee9 | 2742 | Here @var{m} stands for a two-letter machine mode name, in lowercase. |
03dda8e3 RK |
2743 | This instruction pattern moves data with that machine mode from operand |
2744 | 1 to operand 0. For example, @samp{movsi} moves full-word data. | |
2745 | ||
2746 | If operand 0 is a @code{subreg} with mode @var{m} of a register whose | |
2747 | own mode is wider than @var{m}, the effect of this instruction is | |
2748 | to store the specified value in the part of the register that corresponds | |
8feb4e28 JL |
2749 | to mode @var{m}. Bits outside of @var{m}, but which are within the |
2750 | same target word as the @code{subreg} are undefined. Bits which are | |
2751 | outside the target word are left unchanged. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2752 | |
2753 | This class of patterns is special in several ways. First of all, each | |
65945ec1 HPN |
2754 | of these names up to and including full word size @emph{must} be defined, |
2755 | because there is no other way to copy a datum from one place to another. | |
2756 | If there are patterns accepting operands in larger modes, | |
2757 | @samp{mov@var{m}} must be defined for integer modes of those sizes. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2758 | |
2759 | Second, these patterns are not used solely in the RTL generation pass. | |
2760 | Even the reload pass can generate move insns to copy values from stack | |
2761 | slots into temporary registers. When it does so, one of the operands is | |
2762 | a hard register and the other is an operand that can need to be reloaded | |
2763 | into a register. | |
2764 | ||
2765 | @findex force_reg | |
2766 | Therefore, when given such a pair of operands, the pattern must generate | |
2767 | RTL which needs no reloading and needs no temporary registers---no | |
2768 | registers other than the operands. For example, if you support the | |
2769 | pattern with a @code{define_expand}, then in such a case the | |
2770 | @code{define_expand} mustn't call @code{force_reg} or any other such | |
2771 | function which might generate new pseudo registers. | |
2772 | ||
2773 | This requirement exists even for subword modes on a RISC machine where | |
2774 | fetching those modes from memory normally requires several insns and | |
39ed8974 | 2775 | some temporary registers. |
03dda8e3 RK |
2776 | |
2777 | @findex change_address | |
2778 | During reload a memory reference with an invalid address may be passed | |
2779 | as an operand. Such an address will be replaced with a valid address | |
2780 | later in the reload pass. In this case, nothing may be done with the | |
2781 | address except to use it as it stands. If it is copied, it will not be | |
2782 | replaced with a valid address. No attempt should be made to make such | |
2783 | an address into a valid address and no routine (such as | |
2784 | @code{change_address}) that will do so may be called. Note that | |
2785 | @code{general_operand} will fail when applied to such an address. | |
2786 | ||
2787 | @findex reload_in_progress | |
2788 | The global variable @code{reload_in_progress} (which must be explicitly | |
2789 | declared if required) can be used to determine whether such special | |
2790 | handling is required. | |
2791 | ||
2792 | The variety of operands that have reloads depends on the rest of the | |
2793 | machine description, but typically on a RISC machine these can only be | |
2794 | pseudo registers that did not get hard registers, while on other | |
2795 | machines explicit memory references will get optional reloads. | |
2796 | ||
2797 | If a scratch register is required to move an object to or from memory, | |
f1db3576 JL |
2798 | it can be allocated using @code{gen_reg_rtx} prior to life analysis. |
2799 | ||
9c34dbbf ZW |
2800 | If there are cases which need scratch registers during or after reload, |
2801 | you must define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} and/or | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2802 | @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to detect them, and provide |
2803 | patterns @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}} to handle | |
2804 | them. @xref{Register Classes}. | |
2805 | ||
f1db3576 JL |
2806 | @findex no_new_pseudos |
2807 | The global variable @code{no_new_pseudos} can be used to determine if it | |
2808 | is unsafe to create new pseudo registers. If this variable is nonzero, then | |
2809 | it is unsafe to call @code{gen_reg_rtx} to allocate a new pseudo. | |
2810 | ||
956d6950 | 2811 | The constraints on a @samp{mov@var{m}} must permit moving any hard |
03dda8e3 RK |
2812 | register to any other hard register provided that |
2813 | @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} permits mode @var{m} in both registers and | |
2814 | @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their classes returns a value of 2. | |
2815 | ||
956d6950 | 2816 | It is obligatory to support floating point @samp{mov@var{m}} |
03dda8e3 RK |
2817 | instructions into and out of any registers that can hold fixed point |
2818 | values, because unions and structures (which have modes @code{SImode} or | |
2819 | @code{DImode}) can be in those registers and they may have floating | |
2820 | point members. | |
2821 | ||
956d6950 | 2822 | There may also be a need to support fixed point @samp{mov@var{m}} |
03dda8e3 RK |
2823 | instructions in and out of floating point registers. Unfortunately, I |
2824 | have forgotten why this was so, and I don't know whether it is still | |
2825 | true. If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} rejects fixed point values in | |
2826 | floating point registers, then the constraints of the fixed point | |
956d6950 | 2827 | @samp{mov@var{m}} instructions must be designed to avoid ever trying to |
03dda8e3 RK |
2828 | reload into a floating point register. |
2829 | ||
2830 | @cindex @code{reload_in} instruction pattern | |
2831 | @cindex @code{reload_out} instruction pattern | |
2832 | @item @samp{reload_in@var{m}} | |
2833 | @itemx @samp{reload_out@var{m}} | |
2834 | Like @samp{mov@var{m}}, but used when a scratch register is required to | |
2835 | move between operand 0 and operand 1. Operand 2 describes the scratch | |
2836 | register. See the discussion of the @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} | |
2837 | macro in @pxref{Register Classes}. | |
2838 | ||
d989f648 | 2839 | There are special restrictions on the form of the @code{match_operand}s |
f282ffb3 | 2840 | used in these patterns. First, only the predicate for the reload |
560dbedd RH |
2841 | operand is examined, i.e., @code{reload_in} examines operand 1, but not |
2842 | the predicates for operand 0 or 2. Second, there may be only one | |
d989f648 RH |
2843 | alternative in the constraints. Third, only a single register class |
2844 | letter may be used for the constraint; subsequent constraint letters | |
2845 | are ignored. As a special exception, an empty constraint string | |
2846 | matches the @code{ALL_REGS} register class. This may relieve ports | |
2847 | of the burden of defining an @code{ALL_REGS} constraint letter just | |
2848 | for these patterns. | |
2849 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2850 | @cindex @code{movstrict@var{m}} instruction pattern |
2851 | @item @samp{movstrict@var{m}} | |
2852 | Like @samp{mov@var{m}} except that if operand 0 is a @code{subreg} | |
2853 | with mode @var{m} of a register whose natural mode is wider, | |
2854 | the @samp{movstrict@var{m}} instruction is guaranteed not to alter | |
2855 | any of the register except the part which belongs to mode @var{m}. | |
2856 | ||
1e0598e2 RH |
2857 | @cindex @code{movmisalign@var{m}} instruction pattern |
2858 | @item @samp{movmisalign@var{m}} | |
2859 | This variant of a move pattern is designed to load or store a value | |
2860 | from a memory address that is not naturally aligned for its mode. | |
2861 | For a store, the memory will be in operand 0; for a load, the memory | |
2862 | will be in operand 1. The other operand is guaranteed not to be a | |
2863 | memory, so that it's easy to tell whether this is a load or store. | |
2864 | ||
2865 | This pattern is used by the autovectorizer, and when expanding a | |
2866 | @code{MISALIGNED_INDIRECT_REF} expression. | |
2867 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2868 | @cindex @code{load_multiple} instruction pattern |
2869 | @item @samp{load_multiple} | |
2870 | Load several consecutive memory locations into consecutive registers. | |
2871 | Operand 0 is the first of the consecutive registers, operand 1 | |
2872 | is the first memory location, and operand 2 is a constant: the | |
2873 | number of consecutive registers. | |
2874 | ||
2875 | Define this only if the target machine really has such an instruction; | |
2876 | do not define this if the most efficient way of loading consecutive | |
2877 | registers from memory is to do them one at a time. | |
2878 | ||
2879 | On some machines, there are restrictions as to which consecutive | |
2880 | registers can be stored into memory, such as particular starting or | |
2881 | ending register numbers or only a range of valid counts. For those | |
2882 | machines, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) | |
2883 | and make the pattern fail if the restrictions are not met. | |
2884 | ||
2885 | Write the generated insn as a @code{parallel} with elements being a | |
2886 | @code{set} of one register from the appropriate memory location (you may | |
2887 | also need @code{use} or @code{clobber} elements). Use a | |
2888 | @code{match_parallel} (@pxref{RTL Template}) to recognize the insn. See | |
c9693e96 | 2889 | @file{rs6000.md} for examples of the use of this insn pattern. |
03dda8e3 RK |
2890 | |
2891 | @cindex @samp{store_multiple} instruction pattern | |
2892 | @item @samp{store_multiple} | |
2893 | Similar to @samp{load_multiple}, but store several consecutive registers | |
2894 | into consecutive memory locations. Operand 0 is the first of the | |
2895 | consecutive memory locations, operand 1 is the first register, and | |
2896 | operand 2 is a constant: the number of consecutive registers. | |
2897 | ||
ef1140a9 JH |
2898 | @cindex @code{vec_set@var{m}} instruction pattern |
2899 | @item @samp{vec_set@var{m}} | |
2900 | Set given field in the vector value. Operand 0 is the vector to modify, | |
2901 | operand 1 is new value of field and operand 2 specify the field index. | |
2902 | ||
2903 | @cindex @code{vec_extract@var{m}} instruction pattern | |
2904 | @item @samp{vec_extract@var{m}} | |
2905 | Extract given field from the vector value. Operand 1 is the vector, operand 2 | |
2906 | specify field index and operand 0 place to store value into. | |
2907 | ||
2908 | @cindex @code{vec_init@var{m}} instruction pattern | |
2909 | @item @samp{vec_init@var{m}} | |
425a2bde | 2910 | Initialize the vector to given values. Operand 0 is the vector to initialize |
ef1140a9 JH |
2911 | and operand 1 is parallel containing values for individual fields. |
2912 | ||
38f4324c JH |
2913 | @cindex @code{push@var{m}} instruction pattern |
2914 | @item @samp{push@var{m}} | |
299c5111 | 2915 | Output a push instruction. Operand 0 is value to push. Used only when |
38f4324c JH |
2916 | @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined. For historical reason, this pattern may be |
2917 | missing and in such case an @code{mov} expander is used instead, with a | |
6e9aac46 | 2918 | @code{MEM} expression forming the push operation. The @code{mov} expander |
38f4324c JH |
2919 | method is deprecated. |
2920 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
2921 | @cindex @code{add@var{m}3} instruction pattern |
2922 | @item @samp{add@var{m}3} | |
2923 | Add operand 2 and operand 1, storing the result in operand 0. All operands | |
2924 | must have mode @var{m}. This can be used even on two-address machines, by | |
2925 | means of constraints requiring operands 1 and 0 to be the same location. | |
2926 | ||
2927 | @cindex @code{sub@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2928 | @cindex @code{mul@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2929 | @cindex @code{div@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2930 | @cindex @code{udiv@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2931 | @cindex @code{mod@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2932 | @cindex @code{umod@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2933 | @cindex @code{umin@var{m}3} instruction pattern |
2934 | @cindex @code{umax@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2935 | @cindex @code{and@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2936 | @cindex @code{ior@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2937 | @cindex @code{xor@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
2938 | @item @samp{sub@var{m}3}, @samp{mul@var{m}3} | |
7ae4d8d4 RH |
2939 | @itemx @samp{div@var{m}3}, @samp{udiv@var{m}3} |
2940 | @itemx @samp{mod@var{m}3}, @samp{umod@var{m}3} | |
2941 | @itemx @samp{umin@var{m}3}, @samp{umax@var{m}3} | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2942 | @itemx @samp{and@var{m}3}, @samp{ior@var{m}3}, @samp{xor@var{m}3} |
2943 | Similar, for other arithmetic operations. | |
7ae4d8d4 | 2944 | |
b71b019a JH |
2945 | @cindex @code{min@var{m}3} instruction pattern |
2946 | @cindex @code{max@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
7ae4d8d4 RH |
2947 | @item @samp{smin@var{m}3}, @samp{smax@var{m}3} |
2948 | Signed minimum and maximum operations. When used with floating point, | |
2949 | if both operands are zeros, or if either operand is @code{NaN}, then | |
2950 | it is unspecified which of the two operands is returned as the result. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
2951 | |
2952 | @cindex @code{mulhisi3} instruction pattern | |
2953 | @item @samp{mulhisi3} | |
2954 | Multiply operands 1 and 2, which have mode @code{HImode}, and store | |
2955 | a @code{SImode} product in operand 0. | |
2956 | ||
2957 | @cindex @code{mulqihi3} instruction pattern | |
2958 | @cindex @code{mulsidi3} instruction pattern | |
2959 | @item @samp{mulqihi3}, @samp{mulsidi3} | |
2960 | Similar widening-multiplication instructions of other widths. | |
2961 | ||
2962 | @cindex @code{umulqihi3} instruction pattern | |
2963 | @cindex @code{umulhisi3} instruction pattern | |
2964 | @cindex @code{umulsidi3} instruction pattern | |
2965 | @item @samp{umulqihi3}, @samp{umulhisi3}, @samp{umulsidi3} | |
2966 | Similar widening-multiplication instructions that do unsigned | |
2967 | multiplication. | |
2968 | ||
2969 | @cindex @code{smul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern | |
759c58af | 2970 | @item @samp{smul@var{m}3_highpart} |
03dda8e3 RK |
2971 | Perform a signed multiplication of operands 1 and 2, which have mode |
2972 | @var{m}, and store the most significant half of the product in operand 0. | |
2973 | The least significant half of the product is discarded. | |
2974 | ||
2975 | @cindex @code{umul@var{m}3_highpart} instruction pattern | |
2976 | @item @samp{umul@var{m}3_highpart} | |
2977 | Similar, but the multiplication is unsigned. | |
2978 | ||
2979 | @cindex @code{divmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern | |
2980 | @item @samp{divmod@var{m}4} | |
2981 | Signed division that produces both a quotient and a remainder. | |
2982 | Operand 1 is divided by operand 2 to produce a quotient stored | |
2983 | in operand 0 and a remainder stored in operand 3. | |
2984 | ||
2985 | For machines with an instruction that produces both a quotient and a | |
2986 | remainder, provide a pattern for @samp{divmod@var{m}4} but do not | |
2987 | provide patterns for @samp{div@var{m}3} and @samp{mod@var{m}3}. This | |
2988 | allows optimization in the relatively common case when both the quotient | |
2989 | and remainder are computed. | |
2990 | ||
2991 | If an instruction that just produces a quotient or just a remainder | |
2992 | exists and is more efficient than the instruction that produces both, | |
2993 | write the output routine of @samp{divmod@var{m}4} to call | |
2994 | @code{find_reg_note} and look for a @code{REG_UNUSED} note on the | |
2995 | quotient or remainder and generate the appropriate instruction. | |
2996 | ||
2997 | @cindex @code{udivmod@var{m}4} instruction pattern | |
2998 | @item @samp{udivmod@var{m}4} | |
2999 | Similar, but does unsigned division. | |
3000 | ||
273a2526 | 3001 | @anchor{shift patterns} |
03dda8e3 RK |
3002 | @cindex @code{ashl@var{m}3} instruction pattern |
3003 | @item @samp{ashl@var{m}3} | |
3004 | Arithmetic-shift operand 1 left by a number of bits specified by operand | |
3005 | 2, and store the result in operand 0. Here @var{m} is the mode of | |
3006 | operand 0 and operand 1; operand 2's mode is specified by the | |
3007 | instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that | |
273a2526 RS |
3008 | mode before generating the instruction. The meaning of out-of-range shift |
3009 | counts can optionally be specified by @code{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}. | |
3010 | @xref{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3011 | |
3012 | @cindex @code{ashr@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
3013 | @cindex @code{lshr@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
3014 | @cindex @code{rotl@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
3015 | @cindex @code{rotr@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
3016 | @item @samp{ashr@var{m}3}, @samp{lshr@var{m}3}, @samp{rotl@var{m}3}, @samp{rotr@var{m}3} | |
3017 | Other shift and rotate instructions, analogous to the | |
3018 | @code{ashl@var{m}3} instructions. | |
3019 | ||
3020 | @cindex @code{neg@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3021 | @item @samp{neg@var{m}2} | |
3022 | Negate operand 1 and store the result in operand 0. | |
3023 | ||
3024 | @cindex @code{abs@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3025 | @item @samp{abs@var{m}2} | |
3026 | Store the absolute value of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3027 | ||
3028 | @cindex @code{sqrt@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3029 | @item @samp{sqrt@var{m}2} | |
3030 | Store the square root of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3031 | ||
3032 | The @code{sqrt} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
e7b489c8 RS |
3033 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sqrtf} |
3034 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3035 | type @code{float}. | |
3036 | ||
3037 | @cindex @code{cos@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3038 | @item @samp{cos@var{m}2} | |
3039 | Store the cosine of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3040 | ||
3041 | The @code{cos} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3042 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{cosf} | |
3043 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3044 | type @code{float}. | |
3045 | ||
3046 | @cindex @code{sin@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3047 | @item @samp{sin@var{m}2} | |
3048 | Store the sine of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3049 | ||
3050 | The @code{sin} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3051 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{sinf} | |
3052 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3053 | type @code{float}. | |
3054 | ||
3055 | @cindex @code{exp@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3056 | @item @samp{exp@var{m}2} | |
3057 | Store the exponential of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3058 | ||
3059 | The @code{exp} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3060 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{expf} | |
3061 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3062 | type @code{float}. | |
3063 | ||
3064 | @cindex @code{log@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3065 | @item @samp{log@var{m}2} | |
3066 | Store the natural logarithm of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3067 | ||
3068 | The @code{log} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3069 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{logf} | |
3070 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3071 | type @code{float}. | |
03dda8e3 | 3072 | |
b5e01d4b RS |
3073 | @cindex @code{pow@var{m}3} instruction pattern |
3074 | @item @samp{pow@var{m}3} | |
3075 | Store the value of operand 1 raised to the exponent operand 2 | |
3076 | into operand 0. | |
3077 | ||
3078 | The @code{pow} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3079 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{powf} | |
3080 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3081 | type @code{float}. | |
3082 | ||
3083 | @cindex @code{atan2@var{m}3} instruction pattern | |
3084 | @item @samp{atan2@var{m}3} | |
3085 | Store the arc tangent (inverse tangent) of operand 1 divided by | |
3086 | operand 2 into operand 0, using the signs of both arguments to | |
3087 | determine the quadrant of the result. | |
3088 | ||
3089 | The @code{atan2} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3090 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{atan2f} | |
3091 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3092 | type @code{float}. | |
3093 | ||
4977bab6 ZW |
3094 | @cindex @code{floor@var{m}2} instruction pattern |
3095 | @item @samp{floor@var{m}2} | |
3096 | Store the largest integral value not greater than argument. | |
3097 | ||
3098 | The @code{floor} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3099 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{floorf} | |
3100 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3101 | type @code{float}. | |
3102 | ||
10553f10 UB |
3103 | @cindex @code{btrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern |
3104 | @item @samp{btrunc@var{m}2} | |
4977bab6 ZW |
3105 | Store the argument rounded to integer towards zero. |
3106 | ||
3107 | The @code{trunc} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3108 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{truncf} | |
3109 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3110 | type @code{float}. | |
3111 | ||
3112 | @cindex @code{round@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3113 | @item @samp{round@var{m}2} | |
3114 | Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero. | |
3115 | ||
3116 | The @code{round} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3117 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{roundf} | |
3118 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3119 | type @code{float}. | |
3120 | ||
3121 | @cindex @code{ceil@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3122 | @item @samp{ceil@var{m}2} | |
3123 | Store the argument rounded to integer away from zero. | |
3124 | ||
3125 | The @code{ceil} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3126 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{ceilf} | |
3127 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3128 | type @code{float}. | |
3129 | ||
3130 | @cindex @code{nearbyint@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3131 | @item @samp{nearbyint@var{m}2} | |
3132 | Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode | |
3133 | ||
3134 | The @code{nearbyint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3135 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{nearbyintf} | |
3136 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3137 | type @code{float}. | |
3138 | ||
10553f10 UB |
3139 | @cindex @code{rint@var{m}2} instruction pattern |
3140 | @item @samp{rint@var{m}2} | |
3141 | Store the argument rounded according to the default rounding mode and | |
3142 | raise the inexact exception when the result differs in value from | |
3143 | the argument | |
3144 | ||
3145 | The @code{rint} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3146 | corresponds to the C data type @code{double} and the @code{rintf} | |
3147 | built-in function uses the mode which corresponds to the C data | |
3148 | type @code{float}. | |
3149 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3150 | @cindex @code{ffs@var{m}2} instruction pattern |
3151 | @item @samp{ffs@var{m}2} | |
3152 | Store into operand 0 one plus the index of the least significant 1-bit | |
3153 | of operand 1. If operand 1 is zero, store zero. @var{m} is the mode | |
3154 | of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction | |
3155 | pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before | |
3156 | generating the instruction. | |
3157 | ||
3158 | The @code{ffs} built-in function of C always uses the mode which | |
3159 | corresponds to the C data type @code{int}. | |
3160 | ||
2928cd7a RH |
3161 | @cindex @code{clz@var{m}2} instruction pattern |
3162 | @item @samp{clz@var{m}2} | |
3163 | Store into operand 0 the number of leading 0-bits in @var{x}, starting | |
3164 | at the most significant bit position. If @var{x} is 0, the result is | |
3165 | undefined. @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is | |
3166 | specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the | |
3167 | operand to that mode before generating the instruction. | |
3168 | ||
3169 | @cindex @code{ctz@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3170 | @item @samp{ctz@var{m}2} | |
3171 | Store into operand 0 the number of trailing 0-bits in @var{x}, starting | |
3172 | at the least significant bit position. If @var{x} is 0, the result is | |
3173 | undefined. @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is | |
3174 | specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert the | |
3175 | operand to that mode before generating the instruction. | |
3176 | ||
3177 | @cindex @code{popcount@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3178 | @item @samp{popcount@var{m}2} | |
3179 | Store into operand 0 the number of 1-bits in @var{x}. @var{m} is the | |
3180 | mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode is specified by the instruction | |
3181 | pattern, and the compiler will convert the operand to that mode before | |
3182 | generating the instruction. | |
3183 | ||
3184 | @cindex @code{parity@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3185 | @item @samp{parity@var{m}2} | |
8a36672b | 3186 | Store into operand 0 the parity of @var{x}, i.e.@: the number of 1-bits |
2928cd7a RH |
3187 | in @var{x} modulo 2. @var{m} is the mode of operand 0; operand 1's mode |
3188 | is specified by the instruction pattern, and the compiler will convert | |
3189 | the operand to that mode before generating the instruction. | |
3190 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3191 | @cindex @code{one_cmpl@var{m}2} instruction pattern |
3192 | @item @samp{one_cmpl@var{m}2} | |
3193 | Store the bitwise-complement of operand 1 into operand 0. | |
3194 | ||
3195 | @cindex @code{cmp@var{m}} instruction pattern | |
3196 | @item @samp{cmp@var{m}} | |
3197 | Compare operand 0 and operand 1, and set the condition codes. | |
3198 | The RTL pattern should look like this: | |
3199 | ||
3200 | @smallexample | |
3201 | (set (cc0) (compare (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}) | |
3202 | (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{}))) | |
3203 | @end smallexample | |
3204 | ||
3205 | @cindex @code{tst@var{m}} instruction pattern | |
3206 | @item @samp{tst@var{m}} | |
3207 | Compare operand 0 against zero, and set the condition codes. | |
3208 | The RTL pattern should look like this: | |
3209 | ||
3210 | @smallexample | |
3211 | (set (cc0) (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{})) | |
3212 | @end smallexample | |
3213 | ||
3214 | @samp{tst@var{m}} patterns should not be defined for machines that do | |
3215 | not use @code{(cc0)}. Doing so would confuse the optimizer since it | |
3216 | would no longer be clear which @code{set} operations were comparisons. | |
3217 | The @samp{cmp@var{m}} patterns should be used instead. | |
3218 | ||
70128ad9 AO |
3219 | @cindex @code{movmem@var{m}} instruction pattern |
3220 | @item @samp{movmem@var{m}} | |
beed8fc0 AO |
3221 | Block move instruction. The destination and source blocks of memory |
3222 | are the first two operands, and both are @code{mem:BLK}s with an | |
3223 | address in mode @code{Pmode}. | |
e5e809f4 | 3224 | |
03dda8e3 | 3225 | The number of bytes to move is the third operand, in mode @var{m}. |
e5e809f4 JL |
3226 | Usually, you specify @code{word_mode} for @var{m}. However, if you can |
3227 | generate better code knowing the range of valid lengths is smaller than | |
3228 | those representable in a full word, you should provide a pattern with a | |
3229 | mode corresponding to the range of values you can handle efficiently | |
3230 | (e.g., @code{QImode} for values in the range 0--127; note we avoid numbers | |
3231 | that appear negative) and also a pattern with @code{word_mode}. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3232 | |
3233 | The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and | |
3234 | destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx. Thus, if the | |
3235 | compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned, | |
3236 | it may provide the value 4 for this operand. | |
3237 | ||
70128ad9 | 3238 | Descriptions of multiple @code{movmem@var{m}} patterns can only be |
4693911f | 3239 | beneficial if the patterns for smaller modes have fewer restrictions |
8c01d9b6 | 3240 | on their first, second and fourth operands. Note that the mode @var{m} |
70128ad9 | 3241 | in @code{movmem@var{m}} does not impose any restriction on the mode of |
8c01d9b6 JL |
3242 | individually moved data units in the block. |
3243 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3244 | These patterns need not give special consideration to the possibility |
3245 | that the source and destination strings might overlap. | |
3246 | ||
beed8fc0 AO |
3247 | @cindex @code{movstr} instruction pattern |
3248 | @item @samp{movstr} | |
3249 | String copy instruction, with @code{stpcpy} semantics. Operand 0 is | |
3250 | an output operand in mode @code{Pmode}. The addresses of the | |
3251 | destination and source strings are operands 1 and 2, and both are | |
3252 | @code{mem:BLK}s with addresses in mode @code{Pmode}. The execution of | |
3253 | the expansion of this pattern should store in operand 0 the address in | |
3254 | which the @code{NUL} terminator was stored in the destination string. | |
3255 | ||
57e84f18 AS |
3256 | @cindex @code{setmem@var{m}} instruction pattern |
3257 | @item @samp{setmem@var{m}} | |
3258 | Block set instruction. The destination string is the first operand, | |
beed8fc0 | 3259 | given as a @code{mem:BLK} whose address is in mode @code{Pmode}. The |
57e84f18 AS |
3260 | number of bytes to set is the second operand, in mode @var{m}. The value to |
3261 | initialize the memory with is the third operand. Targets that only support the | |
3262 | clearing of memory should reject any value that is not the constant 0. See | |
beed8fc0 | 3263 | @samp{movmem@var{m}} for a discussion of the choice of mode. |
03dda8e3 | 3264 | |
57e84f18 | 3265 | The fourth operand is the known alignment of the destination, in the form |
03dda8e3 RK |
3266 | of a @code{const_int} rtx. Thus, if the compiler knows that the |
3267 | destination is word-aligned, it may provide the value 4 for this | |
3268 | operand. | |
3269 | ||
57e84f18 | 3270 | The use for multiple @code{setmem@var{m}} is as for @code{movmem@var{m}}. |
8c01d9b6 | 3271 | |
40c1d5f8 AS |
3272 | @cindex @code{cmpstrn@var{m}} instruction pattern |
3273 | @item @samp{cmpstrn@var{m}} | |
358b8f01 | 3274 | String compare instruction, with five operands. Operand 0 is the output; |
03dda8e3 | 3275 | it has mode @var{m}. The remaining four operands are like the operands |
70128ad9 | 3276 | of @samp{movmem@var{m}}. The two memory blocks specified are compared |
5cc2f4f3 KG |
3277 | byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each |
3278 | string. The instruction is not allowed to prefetch more than one byte | |
3279 | at a time since either string may end in the first byte and reading past | |
3280 | that may access an invalid page or segment and cause a fault. The | |
3281 | effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 whose sign | |
3282 | indicates the result of the comparison. | |
03dda8e3 | 3283 | |
40c1d5f8 AS |
3284 | @cindex @code{cmpstr@var{m}} instruction pattern |
3285 | @item @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} | |
3286 | String compare instruction, without known maximum length. Operand 0 is the | |
3287 | output; it has mode @var{m}. The second and third operand are the blocks of | |
3288 | memory to be compared; both are @code{mem:BLK} with an address in mode | |
3289 | @code{Pmode}. | |
3290 | ||
3291 | The fourth operand is the known shared alignment of the source and | |
3292 | destination, in the form of a @code{const_int} rtx. Thus, if the | |
3293 | compiler knows that both source and destination are word-aligned, | |
3294 | it may provide the value 4 for this operand. | |
3295 | ||
3296 | The two memory blocks specified are compared byte by byte in lexicographic | |
3297 | order starting at the beginning of each string. The instruction is not allowed | |
3298 | to prefetch more than one byte at a time since either string may end in the | |
3299 | first byte and reading past that may access an invalid page or segment and | |
3300 | cause a fault. The effect of the instruction is to store a value in operand 0 | |
3301 | whose sign indicates the result of the comparison. | |
3302 | ||
358b8f01 JJ |
3303 | @cindex @code{cmpmem@var{m}} instruction pattern |
3304 | @item @samp{cmpmem@var{m}} | |
3305 | Block compare instruction, with five operands like the operands | |
3306 | of @samp{cmpstr@var{m}}. The two memory blocks specified are compared | |
3307 | byte by byte in lexicographic order starting at the beginning of each | |
3308 | block. Unlike @samp{cmpstr@var{m}} the instruction can prefetch | |
3309 | any bytes in the two memory blocks. The effect of the instruction is | |
3310 | to store a value in operand 0 whose sign indicates the result of the | |
3311 | comparison. | |
3312 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3313 | @cindex @code{strlen@var{m}} instruction pattern |
3314 | @item @samp{strlen@var{m}} | |
3315 | Compute the length of a string, with three operands. | |
3316 | Operand 0 is the result (of mode @var{m}), operand 1 is | |
3317 | a @code{mem} referring to the first character of the string, | |
3318 | operand 2 is the character to search for (normally zero), | |
3319 | and operand 3 is a constant describing the known alignment | |
3320 | of the beginning of the string. | |
3321 | ||
3322 | @cindex @code{float@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3323 | @item @samp{float@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3324 | Convert signed integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) to | |
3325 | floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode | |
3326 | @var{n}). | |
3327 | ||
3328 | @cindex @code{floatuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3329 | @item @samp{floatuns@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3330 | Convert unsigned integer operand 1 (valid for fixed point mode @var{m}) | |
3331 | to floating point mode @var{n} and store in operand 0 (which has mode | |
3332 | @var{n}). | |
3333 | ||
3334 | @cindex @code{fix@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3335 | @item @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3336 | Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed | |
3337 | point mode @var{n} as a signed number and store in operand 0 (which | |
3338 | has mode @var{n}). This instruction's result is defined only when | |
3339 | the value of operand 1 is an integer. | |
3340 | ||
0e1d7f32 AH |
3341 | If the machine description defines this pattern, it also needs to |
3342 | define the @code{ftrunc} pattern. | |
3343 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3344 | @cindex @code{fixuns@var{mn}2} instruction pattern |
3345 | @item @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3346 | Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to fixed | |
3347 | point mode @var{n} as an unsigned number and store in operand 0 (which | |
3348 | has mode @var{n}). This instruction's result is defined only when the | |
3349 | value of operand 1 is an integer. | |
3350 | ||
3351 | @cindex @code{ftrunc@var{m}2} instruction pattern | |
3352 | @item @samp{ftrunc@var{m}2} | |
3353 | Convert operand 1 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}) to an | |
3354 | integer value, still represented in floating point mode @var{m}, and | |
3355 | store it in operand 0 (valid for floating point mode @var{m}). | |
3356 | ||
3357 | @cindex @code{fix_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3358 | @item @samp{fix_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3359 | Like @samp{fix@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point value | |
3360 | of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer. | |
3361 | ||
3362 | @cindex @code{fixuns_trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3363 | @item @samp{fixuns_trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3364 | Like @samp{fixuns@var{m}@var{n}2} but works for any floating point | |
3365 | value of mode @var{m} by converting the value to an integer. | |
3366 | ||
3367 | @cindex @code{trunc@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3368 | @item @samp{trunc@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3369 | Truncate operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and | |
3370 | store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Both modes must be fixed | |
3371 | point or both floating point. | |
3372 | ||
3373 | @cindex @code{extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3374 | @item @samp{extend@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3375 | Sign-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and | |
3376 | store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Both modes must be fixed | |
3377 | point or both floating point. | |
3378 | ||
3379 | @cindex @code{zero_extend@var{mn}2} instruction pattern | |
3380 | @item @samp{zero_extend@var{m}@var{n}2} | |
3381 | Zero-extend operand 1 (valid for mode @var{m}) to mode @var{n} and | |
3382 | store in operand 0 (which has mode @var{n}). Both modes must be fixed | |
3383 | point. | |
3384 | ||
3385 | @cindex @code{extv} instruction pattern | |
3386 | @item @samp{extv} | |
c771326b | 3387 | Extract a bit-field from operand 1 (a register or memory operand), where |
03dda8e3 RK |
3388 | operand 2 specifies the width in bits and operand 3 the starting bit, |
3389 | and store it in operand 0. Operand 0 must have mode @code{word_mode}. | |
3390 | Operand 1 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or @code{word_mode}; often | |
3391 | @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers. Operands 2 and 3 must | |
3392 | be valid for @code{word_mode}. | |
3393 | ||
3394 | The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants | |
3395 | for operands 2 and 3. | |
3396 | ||
3397 | The bit-field value is sign-extended to a full word integer | |
3398 | before it is stored in operand 0. | |
3399 | ||
3400 | @cindex @code{extzv} instruction pattern | |
3401 | @item @samp{extzv} | |
3402 | Like @samp{extv} except that the bit-field value is zero-extended. | |
3403 | ||
3404 | @cindex @code{insv} instruction pattern | |
3405 | @item @samp{insv} | |
c771326b JM |
3406 | Store operand 3 (which must be valid for @code{word_mode}) into a |
3407 | bit-field in operand 0, where operand 1 specifies the width in bits and | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3408 | operand 2 the starting bit. Operand 0 may have mode @code{byte_mode} or |
3409 | @code{word_mode}; often @code{word_mode} is allowed only for registers. | |
3410 | Operands 1 and 2 must be valid for @code{word_mode}. | |
3411 | ||
3412 | The RTL generation pass generates this instruction only with constants | |
3413 | for operands 1 and 2. | |
3414 | ||
3415 | @cindex @code{mov@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern | |
3416 | @item @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} | |
3417 | Conditionally move operand 2 or operand 3 into operand 0 according to the | |
3418 | comparison in operand 1. If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved | |
3419 | into operand 0, otherwise operand 3 is moved. | |
3420 | ||
3421 | The mode of the operands being compared need not be the same as the operands | |
3422 | being moved. Some machines, sparc64 for example, have instructions that | |
3423 | conditionally move an integer value based on the floating point condition | |
3424 | codes and vice versa. | |
3425 | ||
3426 | If the machine does not have conditional move instructions, do not | |
3427 | define these patterns. | |
3428 | ||
068f5dea | 3429 | @cindex @code{add@var{mode}cc} instruction pattern |
4b5cc2b3 | 3430 | @item @samp{add@var{mode}cc} |
068f5dea JH |
3431 | Similar to @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} but for conditional addition. Conditionally |
3432 | move operand 2 or (operands 2 + operand 3) into operand 0 according to the | |
3433 | comparison in operand 1. If the comparison is true, operand 2 is moved into | |
4b5cc2b3 | 3434 | operand 0, otherwise (operand 2 + operand 3) is moved. |
068f5dea | 3435 | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3436 | @cindex @code{s@var{cond}} instruction pattern |
3437 | @item @samp{s@var{cond}} | |
3438 | Store zero or nonzero in the operand according to the condition codes. | |
3439 | Value stored is nonzero iff the condition @var{cond} is true. | |
3440 | @var{cond} is the name of a comparison operation expression code, such | |
3441 | as @code{eq}, @code{lt} or @code{leu}. | |
3442 | ||
3443 | You specify the mode that the operand must have when you write the | |
3444 | @code{match_operand} expression. The compiler automatically sees | |
3445 | which mode you have used and supplies an operand of that mode. | |
3446 | ||
3447 | The value stored for a true condition must have 1 as its low bit, or | |
3448 | else must be negative. Otherwise the instruction is not suitable and | |
3449 | you should omit it from the machine description. You describe to the | |
3450 | compiler exactly which value is stored by defining the macro | |
3451 | @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} (@pxref{Misc}). If a description cannot be | |
3452 | found that can be used for all the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns, you | |
3453 | should omit those operations from the machine description. | |
3454 | ||
3455 | These operations may fail, but should do so only in relatively | |
3456 | uncommon cases; if they would fail for common cases involving | |
3457 | integer comparisons, it is best to omit these patterns. | |
3458 | ||
3459 | If these operations are omitted, the compiler will usually generate code | |
3460 | that copies the constant one to the target and branches around an | |
3461 | assignment of zero to the target. If this code is more efficient than | |
3462 | the potential instructions used for the @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern | |
3463 | followed by those required to convert the result into a 1 or a zero in | |
3464 | @code{SImode}, you should omit the @samp{s@var{cond}} operations from | |
3465 | the machine description. | |
3466 | ||
3467 | @cindex @code{b@var{cond}} instruction pattern | |
3468 | @item @samp{b@var{cond}} | |
3469 | Conditional branch instruction. Operand 0 is a @code{label_ref} that | |
3470 | refers to the label to jump to. Jump if the condition codes meet | |
3471 | condition @var{cond}. | |
3472 | ||
3473 | Some machines do not follow the model assumed here where a comparison | |
3474 | instruction is followed by a conditional branch instruction. In that | |
3475 | case, the @samp{cmp@var{m}} (and @samp{tst@var{m}}) patterns should | |
3476 | simply store the operands away and generate all the required insns in a | |
3477 | @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) for the conditional | |
3478 | branch operations. All calls to expand @samp{b@var{cond}} patterns are | |
3479 | immediately preceded by calls to expand either a @samp{cmp@var{m}} | |
3480 | pattern or a @samp{tst@var{m}} pattern. | |
3481 | ||
3482 | Machines that use a pseudo register for the condition code value, or | |
3483 | where the mode used for the comparison depends on the condition being | |
0b433de6 | 3484 | tested, should also use the above mechanism. @xref{Jump Patterns}. |
03dda8e3 RK |
3485 | |
3486 | The above discussion also applies to the @samp{mov@var{mode}cc} and | |
3487 | @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns. | |
3488 | ||
66c87bae KH |
3489 | @cindex @code{cbranch@var{mode}4} instruction pattern |
3490 | @item @samp{cbranch@var{mode}4} | |
3491 | Conditional branch instruction combined with a compare instruction. | |
3492 | Operand 0 is a comparison operator. Operand 1 and operand 2 are the | |
3493 | first and second operands of the comparison, respectively. Operand 3 | |
3494 | is a @code{label_ref} that refers to the label to jump to. | |
3495 | ||
d26eedb6 HPN |
3496 | @cindex @code{jump} instruction pattern |
3497 | @item @samp{jump} | |
3498 | A jump inside a function; an unconditional branch. Operand 0 is the | |
3499 | @code{label_ref} of the label to jump to. This pattern name is mandatory | |
3500 | on all machines. | |
3501 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3502 | @cindex @code{call} instruction pattern |
3503 | @item @samp{call} | |
3504 | Subroutine call instruction returning no value. Operand 0 is the | |
3505 | function to call; operand 1 is the number of bytes of arguments pushed | |
f5963e61 JL |
3506 | as a @code{const_int}; operand 2 is the number of registers used as |
3507 | operands. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3508 | |
3509 | On most machines, operand 2 is not actually stored into the RTL | |
3510 | pattern. It is supplied for the sake of some RISC machines which need | |
3511 | to put this information into the assembler code; they can put it in | |
3512 | the RTL instead of operand 1. | |
3513 | ||
3514 | Operand 0 should be a @code{mem} RTX whose address is the address of the | |
3515 | function. Note, however, that this address can be a @code{symbol_ref} | |
3516 | expression even if it would not be a legitimate memory address on the | |
3517 | target machine. If it is also not a valid argument for a call | |
3518 | instruction, the pattern for this operation should be a | |
3519 | @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) that places the | |
3520 | address into a register and uses that register in the call instruction. | |
3521 | ||
3522 | @cindex @code{call_value} instruction pattern | |
3523 | @item @samp{call_value} | |
3524 | Subroutine call instruction returning a value. Operand 0 is the hard | |
3525 | register in which the value is returned. There are three more | |
3526 | operands, the same as the three operands of the @samp{call} | |
3527 | instruction (but with numbers increased by one). | |
3528 | ||
3529 | Subroutines that return @code{BLKmode} objects use the @samp{call} | |
3530 | insn. | |
3531 | ||
3532 | @cindex @code{call_pop} instruction pattern | |
3533 | @cindex @code{call_value_pop} instruction pattern | |
3534 | @item @samp{call_pop}, @samp{call_value_pop} | |
3535 | Similar to @samp{call} and @samp{call_value}, except used if defined and | |
df2a54e9 | 3536 | if @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is nonzero. They should emit a @code{parallel} |
03dda8e3 RK |
3537 | that contains both the function call and a @code{set} to indicate the |
3538 | adjustment made to the frame pointer. | |
3539 | ||
df2a54e9 | 3540 | For machines where @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} can be nonzero, the use of these |
03dda8e3 RK |
3541 | patterns increases the number of functions for which the frame pointer |
3542 | can be eliminated, if desired. | |
3543 | ||
3544 | @cindex @code{untyped_call} instruction pattern | |
3545 | @item @samp{untyped_call} | |
3546 | Subroutine call instruction returning a value of any type. Operand 0 is | |
3547 | the function to call; operand 1 is a memory location where the result of | |
3548 | calling the function is to be stored; operand 2 is a @code{parallel} | |
3549 | expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates | |
3550 | the saving of a function return value into the result block. | |
3551 | ||
3552 | This instruction pattern should be defined to support | |
3553 | @code{__builtin_apply} on machines where special instructions are needed | |
3554 | to call a subroutine with arbitrary arguments or to save the value | |
3555 | returned. This instruction pattern is required on machines that have | |
e979f9e8 JM |
3556 | multiple registers that can hold a return value |
3557 | (i.e.@: @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} is true for more than one register). | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3558 | |
3559 | @cindex @code{return} instruction pattern | |
3560 | @item @samp{return} | |
3561 | Subroutine return instruction. This instruction pattern name should be | |
3562 | defined only if a single instruction can do all the work of returning | |
3563 | from a function. | |
3564 | ||
3565 | Like the @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, this pattern is also used after the | |
3566 | RTL generation phase. In this case it is to support machines where | |
3567 | multiple instructions are usually needed to return from a function, but | |
3568 | some class of functions only requires one instruction to implement a | |
3569 | return. Normally, the applicable functions are those which do not need | |
3570 | to save any registers or allocate stack space. | |
3571 | ||
3572 | @findex reload_completed | |
3573 | @findex leaf_function_p | |
3574 | For such machines, the condition specified in this pattern should only | |
df2a54e9 | 3575 | be true when @code{reload_completed} is nonzero and the function's |
03dda8e3 RK |
3576 | epilogue would only be a single instruction. For machines with register |
3577 | windows, the routine @code{leaf_function_p} may be used to determine if | |
3578 | a register window push is required. | |
3579 | ||
3580 | Machines that have conditional return instructions should define patterns | |
3581 | such as | |
3582 | ||
3583 | @smallexample | |
3584 | (define_insn "" | |
3585 | [(set (pc) | |
3586 | (if_then_else (match_operator | |
3587 | 0 "comparison_operator" | |
3588 | [(cc0) (const_int 0)]) | |
3589 | (return) | |
3590 | (pc)))] | |
3591 | "@var{condition}" | |
3592 | "@dots{}") | |
3593 | @end smallexample | |
3594 | ||
3595 | where @var{condition} would normally be the same condition specified on the | |
3596 | named @samp{return} pattern. | |
3597 | ||
3598 | @cindex @code{untyped_return} instruction pattern | |
3599 | @item @samp{untyped_return} | |
3600 | Untyped subroutine return instruction. This instruction pattern should | |
3601 | be defined to support @code{__builtin_return} on machines where special | |
3602 | instructions are needed to return a value of any type. | |
3603 | ||
3604 | Operand 0 is a memory location where the result of calling a function | |
3605 | with @code{__builtin_apply} is stored; operand 1 is a @code{parallel} | |
3606 | expression where each element is a @code{set} expression that indicates | |
3607 | the restoring of a function return value from the result block. | |
3608 | ||
3609 | @cindex @code{nop} instruction pattern | |
3610 | @item @samp{nop} | |
3611 | No-op instruction. This instruction pattern name should always be defined | |
3612 | to output a no-op in assembler code. @code{(const_int 0)} will do as an | |
3613 | RTL pattern. | |
3614 | ||
3615 | @cindex @code{indirect_jump} instruction pattern | |
3616 | @item @samp{indirect_jump} | |
3617 | An instruction to jump to an address which is operand zero. | |
3618 | This pattern name is mandatory on all machines. | |
3619 | ||
3620 | @cindex @code{casesi} instruction pattern | |
3621 | @item @samp{casesi} | |
3622 | Instruction to jump through a dispatch table, including bounds checking. | |
3623 | This instruction takes five operands: | |
3624 | ||
3625 | @enumerate | |
3626 | @item | |
3627 | The index to dispatch on, which has mode @code{SImode}. | |
3628 | ||
3629 | @item | |
3630 | The lower bound for indices in the table, an integer constant. | |
3631 | ||
3632 | @item | |
3633 | The total range of indices in the table---the largest index | |
3634 | minus the smallest one (both inclusive). | |
3635 | ||
3636 | @item | |
3637 | A label that precedes the table itself. | |
3638 | ||
3639 | @item | |
3640 | A label to jump to if the index has a value outside the bounds. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3641 | @end enumerate |
3642 | ||
3643 | The table is a @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec} inside of a | |
3644 | @code{jump_insn}. The number of elements in the table is one plus the | |
3645 | difference between the upper bound and the lower bound. | |
3646 | ||
3647 | @cindex @code{tablejump} instruction pattern | |
3648 | @item @samp{tablejump} | |
3649 | Instruction to jump to a variable address. This is a low-level | |
3650 | capability which can be used to implement a dispatch table when there | |
3651 | is no @samp{casesi} pattern. | |
3652 | ||
3653 | This pattern requires two operands: the address or offset, and a label | |
3654 | which should immediately precede the jump table. If the macro | |
f1f5f142 JL |
3655 | @code{CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE} evaluates to a nonzero value then the first |
3656 | operand is an offset which counts from the address of the table; otherwise, | |
3657 | it is an absolute address to jump to. In either case, the first operand has | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3658 | mode @code{Pmode}. |
3659 | ||
3660 | The @samp{tablejump} insn is always the last insn before the jump | |
3661 | table it uses. Its assembler code normally has no need to use the | |
3662 | second operand, but you should incorporate it in the RTL pattern so | |
3663 | that the jump optimizer will not delete the table as unreachable code. | |
3664 | ||
6e4fcc95 MH |
3665 | |
3666 | @cindex @code{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} instruction pattern | |
3667 | @item @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} | |
3668 | Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and | |
df2a54e9 | 3669 | jumps if the register is nonzero. Operand 0 is the register to |
6e4fcc95 | 3670 | decrement and test; operand 1 is the label to jump to if the |
df2a54e9 | 3671 | register is nonzero. @xref{Looping Patterns}. |
6e4fcc95 MH |
3672 | |
3673 | This optional instruction pattern is only used by the combiner, | |
3674 | typically for loops reversed by the loop optimizer when strength | |
3675 | reduction is enabled. | |
3676 | ||
3677 | @cindex @code{doloop_end} instruction pattern | |
3678 | @item @samp{doloop_end} | |
3679 | Conditional branch instruction that decrements a register and jumps if | |
df2a54e9 | 3680 | the register is nonzero. This instruction takes five operands: Operand |
6e4fcc95 MH |
3681 | 0 is the register to decrement and test; operand 1 is the number of loop |
3682 | iterations as a @code{const_int} or @code{const0_rtx} if this cannot be | |
3683 | determined until run-time; operand 2 is the actual or estimated maximum | |
3684 | number of iterations as a @code{const_int}; operand 3 is the number of | |
3685 | enclosed loops as a @code{const_int} (an innermost loop has a value of | |
df2a54e9 | 3686 | 1); operand 4 is the label to jump to if the register is nonzero. |
5c25e11d | 3687 | @xref{Looping Patterns}. |
6e4fcc95 MH |
3688 | |
3689 | This optional instruction pattern should be defined for machines with | |
3690 | low-overhead looping instructions as the loop optimizer will try to | |
3691 | modify suitable loops to utilize it. If nested low-overhead looping is | |
3692 | not supported, use a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) | |
3693 | and make the pattern fail if operand 3 is not @code{const1_rtx}. | |
3694 | Similarly, if the actual or estimated maximum number of iterations is | |
3695 | too large for this instruction, make it fail. | |
3696 | ||
3697 | @cindex @code{doloop_begin} instruction pattern | |
3698 | @item @samp{doloop_begin} | |
3699 | Companion instruction to @code{doloop_end} required for machines that | |
c21cd8b1 JM |
3700 | need to perform some initialization, such as loading special registers |
3701 | used by a low-overhead looping instruction. If initialization insns do | |
6e4fcc95 MH |
3702 | not always need to be emitted, use a @code{define_expand} |
3703 | (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) and make it fail. | |
3704 | ||
3705 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3706 | @cindex @code{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} instruction pattern |
3707 | @item @samp{canonicalize_funcptr_for_compare} | |
3708 | Canonicalize the function pointer in operand 1 and store the result | |
3709 | into operand 0. | |
3710 | ||
3711 | Operand 0 is always a @code{reg} and has mode @code{Pmode}; operand 1 | |
3712 | may be a @code{reg}, @code{mem}, @code{symbol_ref}, @code{const_int}, etc | |
3713 | and also has mode @code{Pmode}. | |
3714 | ||
3715 | Canonicalization of a function pointer usually involves computing | |
3716 | the address of the function which would be called if the function | |
3717 | pointer were used in an indirect call. | |
3718 | ||
3719 | Only define this pattern if function pointers on the target machine | |
3720 | can have different values but still call the same function when | |
3721 | used in an indirect call. | |
3722 | ||
3723 | @cindex @code{save_stack_block} instruction pattern | |
3724 | @cindex @code{save_stack_function} instruction pattern | |
3725 | @cindex @code{save_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern | |
3726 | @cindex @code{restore_stack_block} instruction pattern | |
3727 | @cindex @code{restore_stack_function} instruction pattern | |
3728 | @cindex @code{restore_stack_nonlocal} instruction pattern | |
3729 | @item @samp{save_stack_block} | |
3730 | @itemx @samp{save_stack_function} | |
3731 | @itemx @samp{save_stack_nonlocal} | |
3732 | @itemx @samp{restore_stack_block} | |
3733 | @itemx @samp{restore_stack_function} | |
3734 | @itemx @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} | |
3735 | Most machines save and restore the stack pointer by copying it to or | |
3736 | from an object of mode @code{Pmode}. Do not define these patterns on | |
3737 | such machines. | |
3738 | ||
3739 | Some machines require special handling for stack pointer saves and | |
3740 | restores. On those machines, define the patterns corresponding to the | |
3741 | non-standard cases by using a @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander | |
3742 | Definitions}) that produces the required insns. The three types of | |
3743 | saves and restores are: | |
3744 | ||
3745 | @enumerate | |
3746 | @item | |
3747 | @samp{save_stack_block} saves the stack pointer at the start of a block | |
3748 | that allocates a variable-sized object, and @samp{restore_stack_block} | |
3749 | restores the stack pointer when the block is exited. | |
3750 | ||
3751 | @item | |
3752 | @samp{save_stack_function} and @samp{restore_stack_function} do a | |
3753 | similar job for the outermost block of a function and are used when the | |
3754 | function allocates variable-sized objects or calls @code{alloca}. Only | |
3755 | the epilogue uses the restored stack pointer, allowing a simpler save or | |
3756 | restore sequence on some machines. | |
3757 | ||
3758 | @item | |
3759 | @samp{save_stack_nonlocal} is used in functions that contain labels | |
3760 | branched to by nested functions. It saves the stack pointer in such a | |
3761 | way that the inner function can use @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} to | |
3762 | restore the stack pointer. The compiler generates code to restore the | |
3763 | frame and argument pointer registers, but some machines require saving | |
3764 | and restoring additional data such as register window information or | |
3765 | stack backchains. Place insns in these patterns to save and restore any | |
3766 | such required data. | |
3767 | @end enumerate | |
3768 | ||
3769 | When saving the stack pointer, operand 0 is the save area and operand 1 | |
73c8090f DE |
3770 | is the stack pointer. The mode used to allocate the save area defaults |
3771 | to @code{Pmode} but you can override that choice by defining the | |
7e390c9d | 3772 | @code{STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE} macro (@pxref{Storage Layout}). You must |
73c8090f DE |
3773 | specify an integral mode, or @code{VOIDmode} if no save area is needed |
3774 | for a particular type of save (either because no save is needed or | |
3775 | because a machine-specific save area can be used). Operand 0 is the | |
3776 | stack pointer and operand 1 is the save area for restore operations. If | |
3777 | @samp{save_stack_block} is defined, operand 0 must not be | |
3778 | @code{VOIDmode} since these saves can be arbitrarily nested. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
3779 | |
3780 | A save area is a @code{mem} that is at a constant offset from | |
3781 | @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx} when the stack pointer is saved for use by | |
3782 | nonlocal gotos and a @code{reg} in the other two cases. | |
3783 | ||
3784 | @cindex @code{allocate_stack} instruction pattern | |
3785 | @item @samp{allocate_stack} | |
72938a4c | 3786 | Subtract (or add if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is undefined) operand 1 from |
03dda8e3 RK |
3787 | the stack pointer to create space for dynamically allocated data. |
3788 | ||
72938a4c MM |
3789 | Store the resultant pointer to this space into operand 0. If you |
3790 | are allocating space from the main stack, do this by emitting a | |
3791 | move insn to copy @code{virtual_stack_dynamic_rtx} to operand 0. | |
3792 | If you are allocating the space elsewhere, generate code to copy the | |
3793 | location of the space to operand 0. In the latter case, you must | |
956d6950 | 3794 | ensure this space gets freed when the corresponding space on the main |
72938a4c MM |
3795 | stack is free. |
3796 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3797 | Do not define this pattern if all that must be done is the subtraction. |
3798 | Some machines require other operations such as stack probes or | |
3799 | maintaining the back chain. Define this pattern to emit those | |
3800 | operations in addition to updating the stack pointer. | |
3801 | ||
861bb6c1 JL |
3802 | @cindex @code{check_stack} instruction pattern |
3803 | @item @samp{check_stack} | |
3804 | If stack checking cannot be done on your system by probing the stack with | |
3805 | a load or store instruction (@pxref{Stack Checking}), define this pattern | |
3806 | to perform the needed check and signaling an error if the stack | |
3807 | has overflowed. The single operand is the location in the stack furthest | |
3808 | from the current stack pointer that you need to validate. Normally, | |
3809 | on machines where this pattern is needed, you would obtain the stack | |
3810 | limit from a global or thread-specific variable or register. | |
3811 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
3812 | @cindex @code{nonlocal_goto} instruction pattern |
3813 | @item @samp{nonlocal_goto} | |
3814 | Emit code to generate a non-local goto, e.g., a jump from one function | |
3815 | to a label in an outer function. This pattern has four arguments, | |
3816 | each representing a value to be used in the jump. The first | |
45bb86fd | 3817 | argument is to be loaded into the frame pointer, the second is |
03dda8e3 RK |
3818 | the address to branch to (code to dispatch to the actual label), |
3819 | the third is the address of a location where the stack is saved, | |
3820 | and the last is the address of the label, to be placed in the | |
3821 | location for the incoming static chain. | |
3822 | ||
f0523f02 | 3823 | On most machines you need not define this pattern, since GCC will |
03dda8e3 RK |
3824 | already generate the correct code, which is to load the frame pointer |
3825 | and static chain, restore the stack (using the | |
3826 | @samp{restore_stack_nonlocal} pattern, if defined), and jump indirectly | |
3827 | to the dispatcher. You need only define this pattern if this code will | |
3828 | not work on your machine. | |
3829 | ||
3830 | @cindex @code{nonlocal_goto_receiver} instruction pattern | |
3831 | @item @samp{nonlocal_goto_receiver} | |
3832 | This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the target of a | |
161d7b59 | 3833 | nonlocal goto after the code already generated by GCC@. You will not |
03dda8e3 RK |
3834 | normally need to define this pattern. A typical reason why you might |
3835 | need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global table, | |
c30ddbc9 | 3836 | must be restored when the frame pointer is restored. Note that a nonlocal |
89bcce1b | 3837 | goto only occurs within a unit-of-translation, so a global table pointer |
c30ddbc9 RH |
3838 | that is shared by all functions of a given module need not be restored. |
3839 | There are no arguments. | |
861bb6c1 JL |
3840 | |
3841 | @cindex @code{exception_receiver} instruction pattern | |
3842 | @item @samp{exception_receiver} | |
3843 | This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an | |
3844 | exception handler that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto. You | |
3845 | will not normally need to define this pattern. A typical reason why you | |
3846 | might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global | |
3847 | table, must be restored after control flow is branched to the handler of | |
3848 | an exception. There are no arguments. | |
c85f7c16 | 3849 | |
c30ddbc9 RH |
3850 | @cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_setup} instruction pattern |
3851 | @item @samp{builtin_setjmp_setup} | |
3852 | This pattern, if defined, contains additional code needed to initialize | |
3853 | the @code{jmp_buf}. You will not normally need to define this pattern. | |
3854 | A typical reason why you might need this pattern is if some value, such | |
3855 | as a pointer to a global table, must be restored. Though it is | |
3856 | preferred that the pointer value be recalculated if possible (given the | |
3857 | address of a label for instance). The single argument is a pointer to | |
3858 | the @code{jmp_buf}. Note that the buffer is five words long and that | |
3859 | the first three are normally used by the generic mechanism. | |
3860 | ||
c85f7c16 JL |
3861 | @cindex @code{builtin_setjmp_receiver} instruction pattern |
3862 | @item @samp{builtin_setjmp_receiver} | |
3863 | This pattern, if defined, contains code needed at the site of an | |
c771326b | 3864 | built-in setjmp that isn't needed at the site of a nonlocal goto. You |
c85f7c16 JL |
3865 | will not normally need to define this pattern. A typical reason why you |
3866 | might need this pattern is if some value, such as a pointer to a global | |
c30ddbc9 RH |
3867 | table, must be restored. It takes one argument, which is the label |
3868 | to which builtin_longjmp transfered control; this pattern may be emitted | |
3869 | at a small offset from that label. | |
3870 | ||
3871 | @cindex @code{builtin_longjmp} instruction pattern | |
3872 | @item @samp{builtin_longjmp} | |
3873 | This pattern, if defined, performs the entire action of the longjmp. | |
3874 | You will not normally need to define this pattern unless you also define | |
3875 | @code{builtin_setjmp_setup}. The single argument is a pointer to the | |
3876 | @code{jmp_buf}. | |
f69864aa | 3877 | |
52a11cbf RH |
3878 | @cindex @code{eh_return} instruction pattern |
3879 | @item @samp{eh_return} | |
f69864aa | 3880 | This pattern, if defined, affects the way @code{__builtin_eh_return}, |
52a11cbf RH |
3881 | and thence the call frame exception handling library routines, are |
3882 | built. It is intended to handle non-trivial actions needed along | |
3883 | the abnormal return path. | |
3884 | ||
34dc173c | 3885 | The address of the exception handler to which the function should return |
daf2f129 | 3886 | is passed as operand to this pattern. It will normally need to copied by |
34dc173c UW |
3887 | the pattern to some special register or memory location. |
3888 | If the pattern needs to determine the location of the target call | |
3889 | frame in order to do so, it may use @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX}, | |
3890 | if defined; it will have already been assigned. | |
3891 | ||
3892 | If this pattern is not defined, the default action will be to simply | |
3893 | copy the return address to @code{EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX}. Either | |
3894 | that macro or this pattern needs to be defined if call frame exception | |
3895 | handling is to be used. | |
0b433de6 JL |
3896 | |
3897 | @cindex @code{prologue} instruction pattern | |
17b53c33 | 3898 | @anchor{prologue instruction pattern} |
0b433de6 JL |
3899 | @item @samp{prologue} |
3900 | This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for entry to a function. The function | |
b192711e | 3901 | entry is responsible for setting up the stack frame, initializing the frame |
0b433de6 JL |
3902 | pointer register, saving callee saved registers, etc. |
3903 | ||
3904 | Using a prologue pattern is generally preferred over defining | |
17b53c33 | 3905 | @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} to emit assembly code for the prologue. |
0b433de6 JL |
3906 | |
3907 | The @code{prologue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform | |
3908 | instruction scheduling. | |
3909 | ||
3910 | @cindex @code{epilogue} instruction pattern | |
17b53c33 | 3911 | @anchor{epilogue instruction pattern} |
0b433de6 | 3912 | @item @samp{epilogue} |
396ad517 | 3913 | This pattern emits RTL for exit from a function. The function |
b192711e | 3914 | exit is responsible for deallocating the stack frame, restoring callee saved |
0b433de6 JL |
3915 | registers and emitting the return instruction. |
3916 | ||
3917 | Using an epilogue pattern is generally preferred over defining | |
17b53c33 | 3918 | @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to emit assembly code for the epilogue. |
0b433de6 JL |
3919 | |
3920 | The @code{epilogue} pattern is particularly useful for targets which perform | |
3921 | instruction scheduling or which have delay slots for their return instruction. | |
3922 | ||
3923 | @cindex @code{sibcall_epilogue} instruction pattern | |
3924 | @item @samp{sibcall_epilogue} | |
3925 | This pattern, if defined, emits RTL for exit from a function without the final | |
3926 | branch back to the calling function. This pattern will be emitted before any | |
3927 | sibling call (aka tail call) sites. | |
3928 | ||
3929 | The @code{sibcall_epilogue} pattern must not clobber any arguments used for | |
3930 | parameter passing or any stack slots for arguments passed to the current | |
ebb48a4d | 3931 | function. |
a157febd GK |
3932 | |
3933 | @cindex @code{trap} instruction pattern | |
3934 | @item @samp{trap} | |
3935 | This pattern, if defined, signals an error, typically by causing some | |
3936 | kind of signal to be raised. Among other places, it is used by the Java | |
c771326b | 3937 | front end to signal `invalid array index' exceptions. |
a157febd GK |
3938 | |
3939 | @cindex @code{conditional_trap} instruction pattern | |
3940 | @item @samp{conditional_trap} | |
3941 | Conditional trap instruction. Operand 0 is a piece of RTL which | |
3942 | performs a comparison. Operand 1 is the trap code, an integer. | |
3943 | ||
3944 | A typical @code{conditional_trap} pattern looks like | |
3945 | ||
3946 | @smallexample | |
3947 | (define_insn "conditional_trap" | |
ebb48a4d | 3948 | [(trap_if (match_operator 0 "trap_operator" |
a157febd GK |
3949 | [(cc0) (const_int 0)]) |
3950 | (match_operand 1 "const_int_operand" "i"))] | |
3951 | "" | |
3952 | "@dots{}") | |
3953 | @end smallexample | |
3954 | ||
e83d297b JJ |
3955 | @cindex @code{prefetch} instruction pattern |
3956 | @item @samp{prefetch} | |
3957 | ||
3958 | This pattern, if defined, emits code for a non-faulting data prefetch | |
3959 | instruction. Operand 0 is the address of the memory to prefetch. Operand 1 | |
3960 | is a constant 1 if the prefetch is preparing for a write to the memory | |
3961 | address, or a constant 0 otherwise. Operand 2 is the expected degree of | |
3962 | temporal locality of the data and is a value between 0 and 3, inclusive; 0 | |
3963 | means that the data has no temporal locality, so it need not be left in the | |
3964 | cache after the access; 3 means that the data has a high degree of temporal | |
3965 | locality and should be left in all levels of cache possible; 1 and 2 mean, | |
3966 | respectively, a low or moderate degree of temporal locality. | |
3967 | ||
3968 | Targets that do not support write prefetches or locality hints can ignore | |
3969 | the values of operands 1 and 2. | |
3970 | ||
48ae6c13 RH |
3971 | @cindex @code{memory_barrier} instruction pattern |
3972 | @item @samp{memory_barrier} | |
3973 | ||
3974 | If the target memory model is not fully synchronous, then this pattern | |
3975 | should be defined to an instruction that orders both loads and stores | |
3976 | before the instruction with respect to loads and stores after the instruction. | |
3977 | This pattern has no operands. | |
3978 | ||
3979 | @cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
3980 | @item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}} | |
3981 | ||
3982 | This pattern, if defined, emits code for an atomic compare-and-swap | |
3983 | operation. Operand 1 is the memory on which the atomic operation is | |
3984 | performed. Operand 2 is the ``old'' value to be compared against the | |
3985 | current contents of the memory location. Operand 3 is the ``new'' value | |
3986 | to store in the memory if the compare succeeds. Operand 0 is the result | |
915167f5 GK |
3987 | of the operation; it should contain the contents of the memory |
3988 | before the operation. If the compare succeeds, this should obviously be | |
3989 | a copy of operand 2. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
3990 | |
3991 | This pattern must show that both operand 0 and operand 1 are modified. | |
3992 | ||
915167f5 GK |
3993 | This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all |
3994 | memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic | |
3995 | operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur | |
3996 | after the atomic operation. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
3997 | |
3998 | @cindex @code{sync_compare_and_swap_cc@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
3999 | @item @samp{sync_compare_and_swap_cc@var{mode}} | |
4000 | ||
4001 | This pattern is just like @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}, except | |
4002 | it should act as if compare part of the compare-and-swap were issued via | |
4003 | @code{cmp@var{m}}. This comparison will only be used with @code{EQ} and | |
4004 | @code{NE} branches and @code{setcc} operations. | |
4005 | ||
4006 | Some targets do expose the success or failure of the compare-and-swap | |
4007 | operation via the status flags. Ideally we wouldn't need a separate | |
4008 | named pattern in order to take advantage of this, but the combine pass | |
4009 | does not handle patterns with multiple sets, which is required by | |
4010 | definition for @code{sync_compare_and_swap@var{mode}}. | |
4011 | ||
4012 | @cindex @code{sync_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4013 | @cindex @code{sync_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4014 | @cindex @code{sync_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4015 | @cindex @code{sync_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4016 | @cindex @code{sync_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4017 | @cindex @code{sync_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4018 | @item @samp{sync_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_sub@var{mode}} | |
4019 | @itemx @samp{sync_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_and@var{mode}} | |
4020 | @itemx @samp{sync_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_nand@var{mode}} | |
4021 | ||
4022 | These patterns emit code for an atomic operation on memory. | |
4023 | Operand 0 is the memory on which the atomic operation is performed. | |
4024 | Operand 1 is the second operand to the binary operator. | |
4025 | ||
4026 | The ``nand'' operation is @code{op0 & ~op1}. | |
4027 | ||
915167f5 GK |
4028 | This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all |
4029 | memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic | |
4030 | operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur | |
4031 | after the atomic operation. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
4032 | |
4033 | If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed | |
4034 | from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined. | |
4035 | ||
4036 | @cindex @code{sync_old_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4037 | @cindex @code{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4038 | @cindex @code{sync_old_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4039 | @cindex @code{sync_old_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4040 | @cindex @code{sync_old_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4041 | @cindex @code{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4042 | @item @samp{sync_old_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_sub@var{mode}} | |
4043 | @itemx @samp{sync_old_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_and@var{mode}} | |
4044 | @itemx @samp{sync_old_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_old_nand@var{mode}} | |
4045 | ||
4046 | These patterns are emit code for an atomic operation on memory, | |
4047 | and return the value that the memory contained before the operation. | |
4048 | Operand 0 is the result value, operand 1 is the memory on which the | |
4049 | atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 is the second operand | |
4050 | to the binary operator. | |
4051 | ||
915167f5 GK |
4052 | This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that all |
4053 | memory operations before the atomic operation occur before the atomic | |
4054 | operation and all memory operations after the atomic operation occur | |
4055 | after the atomic operation. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
4056 | |
4057 | If these patterns are not defined, the operation will be constructed | |
4058 | from a compare-and-swap operation, if defined. | |
4059 | ||
4060 | @cindex @code{sync_new_add@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4061 | @cindex @code{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4062 | @cindex @code{sync_new_ior@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4063 | @cindex @code{sync_new_and@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4064 | @cindex @code{sync_new_xor@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4065 | @cindex @code{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4066 | @item @samp{sync_new_add@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_sub@var{mode}} | |
4067 | @itemx @samp{sync_new_ior@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_and@var{mode}} | |
4068 | @itemx @samp{sync_new_xor@var{mode}}, @samp{sync_new_nand@var{mode}} | |
4069 | ||
4070 | These patterns are like their @code{sync_old_@var{op}} counterparts, | |
4071 | except that they return the value that exists in the memory location | |
4072 | after the operation, rather than before the operation. | |
4073 | ||
4074 | @cindex @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4075 | @item @samp{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}} | |
4076 | ||
4077 | This pattern takes two forms, based on the capabilities of the target. | |
4078 | In either case, operand 0 is the result of the operand, operand 1 is | |
4079 | the memory on which the atomic operation is performed, and operand 2 | |
4080 | is the value to set in the lock. | |
4081 | ||
4082 | In the ideal case, this operation is an atomic exchange operation, in | |
4083 | which the previous value in memory operand is copied into the result | |
4084 | operand, and the value operand is stored in the memory operand. | |
4085 | ||
4086 | For less capable targets, any value operand that is not the constant 1 | |
4087 | should be rejected with @code{FAIL}. In this case the target may use | |
4088 | an atomic test-and-set bit operation. The result operand should contain | |
4089 | 1 if the bit was previously set and 0 if the bit was previously clear. | |
4090 | The true contents of the memory operand are implementation defined. | |
4091 | ||
4092 | This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the | |
915167f5 GK |
4093 | pattern as a whole acts as an acquire barrier, that is all memory |
4094 | operations after the pattern do not occur until the lock is acquired. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
4095 | |
4096 | If this pattern is not defined, the operation will be constructed from | |
4097 | a compare-and-swap operation, if defined. | |
4098 | ||
4099 | @cindex @code{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} instruction pattern | |
4100 | @item @samp{sync_lock_release@var{mode}} | |
4101 | ||
4102 | This pattern, if defined, releases a lock set by | |
4103 | @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}. Operand 0 is the memory | |
8635a919 GK |
4104 | that contains the lock; operand 1 is the value to store in the lock. |
4105 | ||
4106 | If the target doesn't implement full semantics for | |
4107 | @code{sync_lock_test_and_set@var{mode}}, any value operand which is not | |
4108 | the constant 0 should be rejected with @code{FAIL}, and the true contents | |
4109 | of the memory operand are implementation defined. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
4110 | |
4111 | This pattern must issue any memory barrier instructions such that the | |
915167f5 GK |
4112 | pattern as a whole acts as a release barrier, that is the lock is |
4113 | released only after all previous memory operations have completed. | |
48ae6c13 RH |
4114 | |
4115 | If this pattern is not defined, then a @code{memory_barrier} pattern | |
8635a919 | 4116 | will be emitted, followed by a store of the value to the memory operand. |
48ae6c13 | 4117 | |
7d69de61 RH |
4118 | @cindex @code{stack_protect_set} instruction pattern |
4119 | @item @samp{stack_protect_set} | |
4120 | ||
4121 | This pattern, if defined, moves a @code{Pmode} value from the memory | |
4122 | in operand 1 to the memory in operand 0 without leaving the value in | |
4123 | a register afterward. This is to avoid leaking the value some place | |
4124 | that an attacker might use to rewrite the stack guard slot after | |
4125 | having clobbered it. | |
4126 | ||
4127 | If this pattern is not defined, then a plain move pattern is generated. | |
4128 | ||
4129 | @cindex @code{stack_protect_test} instruction pattern | |
4130 | @item @samp{stack_protect_test} | |
4131 | ||
4132 | This pattern, if defined, compares a @code{Pmode} value from the | |
4133 | memory in operand 1 with the memory in operand 0 without leaving the | |
3aebbe5f JJ |
4134 | value in a register afterward and branches to operand 2 if the values |
4135 | weren't equal. | |
7d69de61 | 4136 | |
3aebbe5f JJ |
4137 | If this pattern is not defined, then a plain compare pattern and |
4138 | conditional branch pattern is used. | |
7d69de61 | 4139 | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4140 | @end table |
4141 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
4142 | @end ifset |
4143 | @c Each of the following nodes are wrapped in separate | |
4144 | @c "@ifset INTERNALS" to work around memory limits for the default | |
4145 | @c configuration in older tetex distributions. Known to not work: | |
4146 | @c tetex-1.0.7, known to work: tetex-2.0.2. | |
4147 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4148 | @node Pattern Ordering |
4149 | @section When the Order of Patterns Matters | |
4150 | @cindex Pattern Ordering | |
4151 | @cindex Ordering of Patterns | |
4152 | ||
4153 | Sometimes an insn can match more than one instruction pattern. Then the | |
4154 | pattern that appears first in the machine description is the one used. | |
4155 | Therefore, more specific patterns (patterns that will match fewer things) | |
4156 | and faster instructions (those that will produce better code when they | |
4157 | do match) should usually go first in the description. | |
4158 | ||
4159 | In some cases the effect of ordering the patterns can be used to hide | |
4160 | a pattern when it is not valid. For example, the 68000 has an | |
4161 | instruction for converting a fullword to floating point and another | |
4162 | for converting a byte to floating point. An instruction converting | |
4163 | an integer to floating point could match either one. We put the | |
4164 | pattern to convert the fullword first to make sure that one will | |
4165 | be used rather than the other. (Otherwise a large integer might | |
4166 | be generated as a single-byte immediate quantity, which would not work.) | |
4167 | Instead of using this pattern ordering it would be possible to make the | |
4168 | pattern for convert-a-byte smart enough to deal properly with any | |
4169 | constant value. | |
4170 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
4171 | @end ifset |
4172 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4173 | @node Dependent Patterns |
4174 | @section Interdependence of Patterns | |
4175 | @cindex Dependent Patterns | |
4176 | @cindex Interdependence of Patterns | |
4177 | ||
4178 | Every machine description must have a named pattern for each of the | |
4179 | conditional branch names @samp{b@var{cond}}. The recognition template | |
4180 | must always have the form | |
4181 | ||
3ab51846 | 4182 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4183 | (set (pc) |
4184 | (if_then_else (@var{cond} (cc0) (const_int 0)) | |
4185 | (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")) | |
4186 | (pc))) | |
3ab51846 | 4187 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4188 | |
4189 | @noindent | |
4190 | In addition, every machine description must have an anonymous pattern | |
4191 | for each of the possible reverse-conditional branches. Their templates | |
4192 | look like | |
4193 | ||
3ab51846 | 4194 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4195 | (set (pc) |
4196 | (if_then_else (@var{cond} (cc0) (const_int 0)) | |
4197 | (pc) | |
4198 | (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))) | |
3ab51846 | 4199 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4200 | |
4201 | @noindent | |
4202 | They are necessary because jump optimization can turn direct-conditional | |
4203 | branches into reverse-conditional branches. | |
4204 | ||
4205 | It is often convenient to use the @code{match_operator} construct to | |
4206 | reduce the number of patterns that must be specified for branches. For | |
4207 | example, | |
4208 | ||
3ab51846 | 4209 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4210 | (define_insn "" |
4211 | [(set (pc) | |
4212 | (if_then_else (match_operator 0 "comparison_operator" | |
4213 | [(cc0) (const_int 0)]) | |
4214 | (pc) | |
4215 | (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" ""))))] | |
4216 | "@var{condition}" | |
4217 | "@dots{}") | |
3ab51846 | 4218 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4219 | |
4220 | In some cases machines support instructions identical except for the | |
4221 | machine mode of one or more operands. For example, there may be | |
4222 | ``sign-extend halfword'' and ``sign-extend byte'' instructions whose | |
4223 | patterns are | |
4224 | ||
3ab51846 | 4225 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4226 | (set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{}) |
4227 | (extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 @dots{}))) | |
4228 | ||
4229 | (set (match_operand:SI 0 @dots{}) | |
4230 | (extend:SI (match_operand:QI 1 @dots{}))) | |
3ab51846 | 4231 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4232 | |
4233 | @noindent | |
4234 | Constant integers do not specify a machine mode, so an instruction to | |
4235 | extend a constant value could match either pattern. The pattern it | |
4236 | actually will match is the one that appears first in the file. For correct | |
4237 | results, this must be the one for the widest possible mode (@code{HImode}, | |
4238 | here). If the pattern matches the @code{QImode} instruction, the results | |
4239 | will be incorrect if the constant value does not actually fit that mode. | |
4240 | ||
4241 | Such instructions to extend constants are rarely generated because they are | |
4242 | optimized away, but they do occasionally happen in nonoptimized | |
4243 | compilations. | |
4244 | ||
4245 | If a constraint in a pattern allows a constant, the reload pass may | |
4246 | replace a register with a constant permitted by the constraint in some | |
4247 | cases. Similarly for memory references. Because of this substitution, | |
4248 | you should not provide separate patterns for increment and decrement | |
4249 | instructions. Instead, they should be generated from the same pattern | |
4250 | that supports register-register add insns by examining the operands and | |
4251 | generating the appropriate machine instruction. | |
4252 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
4253 | @end ifset |
4254 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4255 | @node Jump Patterns |
4256 | @section Defining Jump Instruction Patterns | |
4257 | @cindex jump instruction patterns | |
4258 | @cindex defining jump instruction patterns | |
4259 | ||
f0523f02 | 4260 | For most machines, GCC assumes that the machine has a condition code. |
03dda8e3 RK |
4261 | A comparison insn sets the condition code, recording the results of both |
4262 | signed and unsigned comparison of the given operands. A separate branch | |
4263 | insn tests the condition code and branches or not according its value. | |
4264 | The branch insns come in distinct signed and unsigned flavors. Many | |
8aeea6e6 | 4265 | common machines, such as the VAX, the 68000 and the 32000, work this |
03dda8e3 RK |
4266 | way. |
4267 | ||
4268 | Some machines have distinct signed and unsigned compare instructions, and | |
4269 | only one set of conditional branch instructions. The easiest way to handle | |
4270 | these machines is to treat them just like the others until the final stage | |
4271 | where assembly code is written. At this time, when outputting code for the | |
4272 | compare instruction, peek ahead at the following branch using | |
4273 | @code{next_cc0_user (insn)}. (The variable @code{insn} refers to the insn | |
4274 | being output, in the output-writing code in an instruction pattern.) If | |
4275 | the RTL says that is an unsigned branch, output an unsigned compare; | |
4276 | otherwise output a signed compare. When the branch itself is output, you | |
4277 | can treat signed and unsigned branches identically. | |
4278 | ||
f0523f02 | 4279 | The reason you can do this is that GCC always generates a pair of |
03dda8e3 RK |
4280 | consecutive RTL insns, possibly separated by @code{note} insns, one to |
4281 | set the condition code and one to test it, and keeps the pair inviolate | |
4282 | until the end. | |
4283 | ||
4284 | To go with this technique, you must define the machine-description macro | |
4285 | @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} to do @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}; in other words, no | |
4286 | compare instruction is superfluous. | |
4287 | ||
4288 | Some machines have compare-and-branch instructions and no condition code. | |
4289 | A similar technique works for them. When it is time to ``output'' a | |
4290 | compare instruction, record its operands in two static variables. When | |
4291 | outputting the branch-on-condition-code instruction that follows, actually | |
4292 | output a compare-and-branch instruction that uses the remembered operands. | |
4293 | ||
4294 | It also works to define patterns for compare-and-branch instructions. | |
4295 | In optimizing compilation, the pair of compare and branch instructions | |
4296 | will be combined according to these patterns. But this does not happen | |
4297 | if optimization is not requested. So you must use one of the solutions | |
4298 | above in addition to any special patterns you define. | |
4299 | ||
4300 | In many RISC machines, most instructions do not affect the condition | |
4301 | code and there may not even be a separate condition code register. On | |
4302 | these machines, the restriction that the definition and use of the | |
4303 | condition code be adjacent insns is not necessary and can prevent | |
4304 | important optimizations. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there is a | |
4305 | delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set three | |
4306 | instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction | |
4307 | scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to | |
4308 | separate the definition and use of the condition code register. | |
4309 | ||
4310 | On these machines, do not use @code{(cc0)}, but instead use a register | |
4311 | to represent the condition code. If there is a specific condition code | |
4312 | register in the machine, use a hard register. If the condition code or | |
4313 | comparison result can be placed in any general register, or if there are | |
4314 | multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register. | |
4315 | ||
4316 | @findex prev_cc0_setter | |
4317 | @findex next_cc0_user | |
4318 | On some machines, the type of branch instruction generated may depend on | |
4319 | the way the condition code was produced; for example, on the 68k and | |
981f6289 | 4320 | SPARC, setting the condition code directly from an add or subtract |
03dda8e3 RK |
4321 | instruction does not clear the overflow bit the way that a test |
4322 | instruction does, so a different branch instruction must be used for | |
4323 | some conditional branches. For machines that use @code{(cc0)}, the set | |
4324 | and use of the condition code must be adjacent (separated only by | |
4325 | @code{note} insns) allowing flags in @code{cc_status} to be used. | |
4326 | (@xref{Condition Code}.) Also, the comparison and branch insns can be | |
4327 | located from each other by using the functions @code{prev_cc0_setter} | |
4328 | and @code{next_cc0_user}. | |
4329 | ||
4330 | However, this is not true on machines that do not use @code{(cc0)}. On | |
4331 | those machines, no assumptions can be made about the adjacency of the | |
4332 | compare and branch insns and the above methods cannot be used. Instead, | |
4333 | we use the machine mode of the condition code register to record | |
4334 | different formats of the condition code register. | |
4335 | ||
4336 | Registers used to store the condition code value should have a mode that | |
4337 | is in class @code{MODE_CC}. Normally, it will be @code{CCmode}. If | |
4338 | additional modes are required (as for the add example mentioned above in | |
f1c9d07d EC |
4339 | the SPARC), define them in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} |
4340 | (@pxref{Condition Code}). Also define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose | |
4341 | a mode given an operand of a compare. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4342 | |
4343 | If it is known during RTL generation that a different mode will be | |
4344 | required (for example, if the machine has separate compare instructions | |
4345 | for signed and unsigned quantities, like most IBM processors), they can | |
4346 | be specified at that time. | |
4347 | ||
4348 | If the cases that require different modes would be made by instruction | |
4349 | combination, the macro @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} determines which machine | |
4350 | mode should be used for the comparison result. The patterns should be | |
981f6289 | 4351 | written using that mode. To support the case of the add on the SPARC |
03dda8e3 RK |
4352 | discussed above, we have the pattern |
4353 | ||
4354 | @smallexample | |
4355 | (define_insn "" | |
4356 | [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0) | |
4357 | (compare:CC_NOOV | |
4358 | (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r") | |
4359 | (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI")) | |
4360 | (const_int 0)))] | |
4361 | "" | |
4362 | "@dots{}") | |
4363 | @end smallexample | |
4364 | ||
981f6289 | 4365 | The @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} macro on the SPARC returns @code{CC_NOOVmode} |
03dda8e3 RK |
4366 | for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}. |
4367 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
4368 | @end ifset |
4369 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4370 | @node Looping Patterns |
4371 | @section Defining Looping Instruction Patterns | |
4372 | @cindex looping instruction patterns | |
4373 | @cindex defining looping instruction patterns | |
4374 | ||
05713b80 | 4375 | Some machines have special jump instructions that can be utilized to |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4376 | make loops more efficient. A common example is the 68000 @samp{dbra} |
4377 | instruction which performs a decrement of a register and a branch if the | |
4378 | result was greater than zero. Other machines, in particular digital | |
4379 | signal processors (DSPs), have special block repeat instructions to | |
4380 | provide low-overhead loop support. For example, the TI TMS320C3x/C4x | |
4381 | DSPs have a block repeat instruction that loads special registers to | |
4382 | mark the top and end of a loop and to count the number of loop | |
4383 | iterations. This avoids the need for fetching and executing a | |
c771326b | 4384 | @samp{dbra}-like instruction and avoids pipeline stalls associated with |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4385 | the jump. |
4386 | ||
9c34dbbf ZW |
4387 | GCC has three special named patterns to support low overhead looping. |
4388 | They are @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, @samp{doloop_begin}, | |
4389 | and @samp{doloop_end}. The first pattern, | |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4390 | @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero}, is not emitted during RTL |
4391 | generation but may be emitted during the instruction combination phase. | |
4392 | This requires the assistance of the loop optimizer, using information | |
4393 | collected during strength reduction, to reverse a loop to count down to | |
4394 | zero. Some targets also require the loop optimizer to add a | |
4395 | @code{REG_NONNEG} note to indicate that the iteration count is always | |
4396 | positive. This is needed if the target performs a signed loop | |
4397 | termination test. For example, the 68000 uses a pattern similar to the | |
4398 | following for its @code{dbra} instruction: | |
4399 | ||
4400 | @smallexample | |
4401 | @group | |
4402 | (define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero" | |
4403 | [(set (pc) | |
4404 | (if_then_else | |
4405 | (ge (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am") | |
4406 | (const_int -1)) | |
4407 | (const_int 0)) | |
4408 | (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" "")) | |
4409 | (pc))) | |
4410 | (set (match_dup 0) | |
4411 | (plus:SI (match_dup 0) | |
4412 | (const_int -1)))] | |
4413 | "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)" | |
630d3d5a | 4414 | "@dots{}") |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4415 | @end group |
4416 | @end smallexample | |
4417 | ||
4418 | Note that since the insn is both a jump insn and has an output, it must | |
4419 | deal with its own reloads, hence the `m' constraints. Also note that | |
4420 | since this insn is generated by the instruction combination phase | |
4421 | combining two sequential insns together into an implicit parallel insn, | |
4422 | the iteration counter needs to be biased by the same amount as the | |
630d3d5a | 4423 | decrement operation, in this case @minus{}1. Note that the following similar |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4424 | pattern will not be matched by the combiner. |
4425 | ||
4426 | @smallexample | |
4427 | @group | |
4428 | (define_insn "decrement_and_branch_until_zero" | |
4429 | [(set (pc) | |
4430 | (if_then_else | |
4431 | (ge (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "+d*am") | |
4432 | (const_int 1)) | |
4433 | (label_ref (match_operand 1 "" "")) | |
4434 | (pc))) | |
4435 | (set (match_dup 0) | |
4436 | (plus:SI (match_dup 0) | |
4437 | (const_int -1)))] | |
4438 | "find_reg_note (insn, REG_NONNEG, 0)" | |
630d3d5a | 4439 | "@dots{}") |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4440 | @end group |
4441 | @end smallexample | |
4442 | ||
4443 | The other two special looping patterns, @samp{doloop_begin} and | |
c21cd8b1 | 4444 | @samp{doloop_end}, are emitted by the loop optimizer for certain |
6e4fcc95 | 4445 | well-behaved loops with a finite number of loop iterations using |
ebb48a4d | 4446 | information collected during strength reduction. |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4447 | |
4448 | The @samp{doloop_end} pattern describes the actual looping instruction | |
4449 | (or the implicit looping operation) and the @samp{doloop_begin} pattern | |
c21cd8b1 | 4450 | is an optional companion pattern that can be used for initialization |
6e4fcc95 MH |
4451 | needed for some low-overhead looping instructions. |
4452 | ||
4453 | Note that some machines require the actual looping instruction to be | |
4454 | emitted at the top of the loop (e.g., the TMS320C3x/C4x DSPs). Emitting | |
4455 | the true RTL for a looping instruction at the top of the loop can cause | |
4456 | problems with flow analysis. So instead, a dummy @code{doloop} insn is | |
4457 | emitted at the end of the loop. The machine dependent reorg pass checks | |
4458 | for the presence of this @code{doloop} insn and then searches back to | |
4459 | the top of the loop, where it inserts the true looping insn (provided | |
4460 | there are no instructions in the loop which would cause problems). Any | |
4461 | additional labels can be emitted at this point. In addition, if the | |
4462 | desired special iteration counter register was not allocated, this | |
4463 | machine dependent reorg pass could emit a traditional compare and jump | |
4464 | instruction pair. | |
4465 | ||
4466 | The essential difference between the | |
4467 | @samp{decrement_and_branch_until_zero} and the @samp{doloop_end} | |
4468 | patterns is that the loop optimizer allocates an additional pseudo | |
4469 | register for the latter as an iteration counter. This pseudo register | |
4470 | cannot be used within the loop (i.e., general induction variables cannot | |
4471 | be derived from it), however, in many cases the loop induction variable | |
4472 | may become redundant and removed by the flow pass. | |
4473 | ||
4474 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
4475 | @end ifset |
4476 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4477 | @node Insn Canonicalizations |
4478 | @section Canonicalization of Instructions | |
4479 | @cindex canonicalization of instructions | |
4480 | @cindex insn canonicalization | |
4481 | ||
4482 | There are often cases where multiple RTL expressions could represent an | |
4483 | operation performed by a single machine instruction. This situation is | |
4484 | most commonly encountered with logical, branch, and multiply-accumulate | |
4485 | instructions. In such cases, the compiler attempts to convert these | |
4486 | multiple RTL expressions into a single canonical form to reduce the | |
4487 | number of insn patterns required. | |
4488 | ||
4489 | In addition to algebraic simplifications, following canonicalizations | |
4490 | are performed: | |
4491 | ||
4492 | @itemize @bullet | |
4493 | @item | |
4494 | For commutative and comparison operators, a constant is always made the | |
4495 | second operand. If a machine only supports a constant as the second | |
4496 | operand, only patterns that match a constant in the second operand need | |
4497 | be supplied. | |
4498 | ||
e3d6e740 GK |
4499 | @item |
4500 | For associative operators, a sequence of operators will always chain | |
4501 | to the left; for instance, only the left operand of an integer @code{plus} | |
4502 | can itself be a @code{plus}. @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, | |
4503 | @code{plus}, @code{mult}, @code{smin}, @code{smax}, @code{umin}, and | |
4504 | @code{umax} are associative when applied to integers, and sometimes to | |
4505 | floating-point. | |
4506 | ||
4507 | @item | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4508 | @cindex @code{neg}, canonicalization of |
4509 | @cindex @code{not}, canonicalization of | |
4510 | @cindex @code{mult}, canonicalization of | |
4511 | @cindex @code{plus}, canonicalization of | |
4512 | @cindex @code{minus}, canonicalization of | |
4513 | For these operators, if only one operand is a @code{neg}, @code{not}, | |
4514 | @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or @code{minus} expression, it will be the | |
4515 | first operand. | |
4516 | ||
16823694 GK |
4517 | @item |
4518 | In combinations of @code{neg}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, and | |
4519 | @code{minus}, the @code{neg} operations (if any) will be moved inside | |
daf2f129 | 4520 | the operations as far as possible. For instance, |
16823694 GK |
4521 | @code{(neg (mult A B))} is canonicalized as @code{(mult (neg A) B)}, but |
4522 | @code{(plus (mult (neg A) B) C)} is canonicalized as | |
4523 | @code{(minus A (mult B C))}. | |
4524 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
4525 | @cindex @code{compare}, canonicalization of |
4526 | @item | |
4527 | For the @code{compare} operator, a constant is always the second operand | |
4528 | on machines where @code{cc0} is used (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). On other | |
4529 | machines, there are rare cases where the compiler might want to construct | |
4530 | a @code{compare} with a constant as the first operand. However, these | |
4531 | cases are not common enough for it to be worthwhile to provide a pattern | |
4532 | matching a constant as the first operand unless the machine actually has | |
4533 | such an instruction. | |
4534 | ||
4535 | An operand of @code{neg}, @code{not}, @code{mult}, @code{plus}, or | |
4536 | @code{minus} is made the first operand under the same conditions as | |
4537 | above. | |
4538 | ||
4539 | @item | |
4540 | @code{(minus @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))} is converted to | |
4541 | @code{(plus @var{x} (const_int @var{-n}))}. | |
4542 | ||
4543 | @item | |
4544 | Within address computations (i.e., inside @code{mem}), a left shift is | |
4545 | converted into the appropriate multiplication by a power of two. | |
4546 | ||
4547 | @cindex @code{ior}, canonicalization of | |
4548 | @cindex @code{and}, canonicalization of | |
4549 | @cindex De Morgan's law | |
72938a4c | 4550 | @item |
090359d6 | 4551 | De Morgan's Law is used to move bitwise negation inside a bitwise |
03dda8e3 RK |
4552 | logical-and or logical-or operation. If this results in only one |
4553 | operand being a @code{not} expression, it will be the first one. | |
4554 | ||
4555 | A machine that has an instruction that performs a bitwise logical-and of one | |
4556 | operand with the bitwise negation of the other should specify the pattern | |
4557 | for that instruction as | |
4558 | ||
3ab51846 | 4559 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4560 | (define_insn "" |
4561 | [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}) | |
4562 | (and:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{})) | |
4563 | (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{})))] | |
4564 | "@dots{}" | |
4565 | "@dots{}") | |
3ab51846 | 4566 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4567 | |
4568 | @noindent | |
4569 | Similarly, a pattern for a ``NAND'' instruction should be written | |
4570 | ||
3ab51846 | 4571 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4572 | (define_insn "" |
4573 | [(set (match_operand:@var{m} 0 @dots{}) | |
4574 | (ior:@var{m} (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 1 @dots{})) | |
4575 | (not:@var{m} (match_operand:@var{m} 2 @dots{}))))] | |
4576 | "@dots{}" | |
4577 | "@dots{}") | |
3ab51846 | 4578 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4579 | |
4580 | In both cases, it is not necessary to include patterns for the many | |
4581 | logically equivalent RTL expressions. | |
4582 | ||
4583 | @cindex @code{xor}, canonicalization of | |
4584 | @item | |
4585 | The only possible RTL expressions involving both bitwise exclusive-or | |
4586 | and bitwise negation are @code{(xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y})} | |
bd819a4a | 4587 | and @code{(not:@var{m} (xor:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}))}. |
03dda8e3 RK |
4588 | |
4589 | @item | |
4590 | The sum of three items, one of which is a constant, will only appear in | |
4591 | the form | |
4592 | ||
3ab51846 | 4593 | @smallexample |
03dda8e3 | 4594 | (plus:@var{m} (plus:@var{m} @var{x} @var{y}) @var{constant}) |
3ab51846 | 4595 | @end smallexample |
03dda8e3 RK |
4596 | |
4597 | @item | |
4598 | On machines that do not use @code{cc0}, | |
4599 | @code{(compare @var{x} (const_int 0))} will be converted to | |
bd819a4a | 4600 | @var{x}. |
03dda8e3 RK |
4601 | |
4602 | @cindex @code{zero_extract}, canonicalization of | |
4603 | @cindex @code{sign_extract}, canonicalization of | |
4604 | @item | |
4605 | Equality comparisons of a group of bits (usually a single bit) with zero | |
4606 | will be written using @code{zero_extract} rather than the equivalent | |
4607 | @code{and} or @code{sign_extract} operations. | |
4608 | ||
4609 | @end itemize | |
4610 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
4611 | @end ifset |
4612 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4613 | @node Expander Definitions |
4614 | @section Defining RTL Sequences for Code Generation | |
4615 | @cindex expander definitions | |
4616 | @cindex code generation RTL sequences | |
4617 | @cindex defining RTL sequences for code generation | |
4618 | ||
4619 | On some target machines, some standard pattern names for RTL generation | |
4620 | cannot be handled with single insn, but a sequence of RTL insns can | |
4621 | represent them. For these target machines, you can write a | |
161d7b59 | 4622 | @code{define_expand} to specify how to generate the sequence of RTL@. |
03dda8e3 RK |
4623 | |
4624 | @findex define_expand | |
4625 | A @code{define_expand} is an RTL expression that looks almost like a | |
4626 | @code{define_insn}; but, unlike the latter, a @code{define_expand} is used | |
4627 | only for RTL generation and it can produce more than one RTL insn. | |
4628 | ||
4629 | A @code{define_expand} RTX has four operands: | |
4630 | ||
4631 | @itemize @bullet | |
4632 | @item | |
4633 | The name. Each @code{define_expand} must have a name, since the only | |
4634 | use for it is to refer to it by name. | |
4635 | ||
03dda8e3 | 4636 | @item |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
4637 | The RTL template. This is a vector of RTL expressions representing |
4638 | a sequence of separate instructions. Unlike @code{define_insn}, there | |
4639 | is no implicit surrounding @code{PARALLEL}. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4640 | |
4641 | @item | |
4642 | The condition, a string containing a C expression. This expression is | |
4643 | used to express how the availability of this pattern depends on | |
f0523f02 JM |
4644 | subclasses of target machine, selected by command-line options when GCC |
4645 | is run. This is just like the condition of a @code{define_insn} that | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4646 | has a standard name. Therefore, the condition (if present) may not |
4647 | depend on the data in the insn being matched, but only the | |
4648 | target-machine-type flags. The compiler needs to test these conditions | |
4649 | during initialization in order to learn exactly which named instructions | |
4650 | are available in a particular run. | |
4651 | ||
4652 | @item | |
4653 | The preparation statements, a string containing zero or more C | |
4654 | statements which are to be executed before RTL code is generated from | |
4655 | the RTL template. | |
4656 | ||
4657 | Usually these statements prepare temporary registers for use as | |
4658 | internal operands in the RTL template, but they can also generate RTL | |
4659 | insns directly by calling routines such as @code{emit_insn}, etc. | |
4660 | Any such insns precede the ones that come from the RTL template. | |
4661 | @end itemize | |
4662 | ||
4663 | Every RTL insn emitted by a @code{define_expand} must match some | |
4664 | @code{define_insn} in the machine description. Otherwise, the compiler | |
4665 | will crash when trying to generate code for the insn or trying to optimize | |
4666 | it. | |
4667 | ||
4668 | The RTL template, in addition to controlling generation of RTL insns, | |
4669 | also describes the operands that need to be specified when this pattern | |
4670 | is used. In particular, it gives a predicate for each operand. | |
4671 | ||
4672 | A true operand, which needs to be specified in order to generate RTL from | |
4673 | the pattern, should be described with a @code{match_operand} in its first | |
4674 | occurrence in the RTL template. This enters information on the operand's | |
f0523f02 | 4675 | predicate into the tables that record such things. GCC uses the |
03dda8e3 RK |
4676 | information to preload the operand into a register if that is required for |
4677 | valid RTL code. If the operand is referred to more than once, subsequent | |
4678 | references should use @code{match_dup}. | |
4679 | ||
4680 | The RTL template may also refer to internal ``operands'' which are | |
4681 | temporary registers or labels used only within the sequence made by the | |
4682 | @code{define_expand}. Internal operands are substituted into the RTL | |
4683 | template with @code{match_dup}, never with @code{match_operand}. The | |
4684 | values of the internal operands are not passed in as arguments by the | |
4685 | compiler when it requests use of this pattern. Instead, they are computed | |
4686 | within the pattern, in the preparation statements. These statements | |
4687 | compute the values and store them into the appropriate elements of | |
4688 | @code{operands} so that @code{match_dup} can find them. | |
4689 | ||
4690 | There are two special macros defined for use in the preparation statements: | |
4691 | @code{DONE} and @code{FAIL}. Use them with a following semicolon, | |
4692 | as a statement. | |
4693 | ||
4694 | @table @code | |
4695 | ||
4696 | @findex DONE | |
4697 | @item DONE | |
4698 | Use the @code{DONE} macro to end RTL generation for the pattern. The | |
4699 | only RTL insns resulting from the pattern on this occasion will be | |
4700 | those already emitted by explicit calls to @code{emit_insn} within the | |
4701 | preparation statements; the RTL template will not be generated. | |
4702 | ||
4703 | @findex FAIL | |
4704 | @item FAIL | |
4705 | Make the pattern fail on this occasion. When a pattern fails, it means | |
4706 | that the pattern was not truly available. The calling routines in the | |
4707 | compiler will try other strategies for code generation using other patterns. | |
4708 | ||
4709 | Failure is currently supported only for binary (addition, multiplication, | |
c771326b | 4710 | shifting, etc.) and bit-field (@code{extv}, @code{extzv}, and @code{insv}) |
03dda8e3 RK |
4711 | operations. |
4712 | @end table | |
4713 | ||
55e4756f DD |
4714 | If the preparation falls through (invokes neither @code{DONE} nor |
4715 | @code{FAIL}), then the @code{define_expand} acts like a | |
4716 | @code{define_insn} in that the RTL template is used to generate the | |
4717 | insn. | |
4718 | ||
4719 | The RTL template is not used for matching, only for generating the | |
4720 | initial insn list. If the preparation statement always invokes | |
4721 | @code{DONE} or @code{FAIL}, the RTL template may be reduced to a simple | |
4722 | list of operands, such as this example: | |
4723 | ||
4724 | @smallexample | |
4725 | @group | |
4726 | (define_expand "addsi3" | |
4727 | [(match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") | |
4728 | (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "") | |
4729 | (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "")] | |
4730 | @end group | |
4731 | @group | |
4732 | "" | |
4733 | " | |
58097133 | 4734 | @{ |
55e4756f DD |
4735 | handle_add (operands[0], operands[1], operands[2]); |
4736 | DONE; | |
58097133 | 4737 | @}") |
55e4756f DD |
4738 | @end group |
4739 | @end smallexample | |
4740 | ||
03dda8e3 RK |
4741 | Here is an example, the definition of left-shift for the SPUR chip: |
4742 | ||
4743 | @smallexample | |
4744 | @group | |
4745 | (define_expand "ashlsi3" | |
4746 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") | |
4747 | (ashift:SI | |
4748 | @end group | |
4749 | @group | |
4750 | (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "") | |
4751 | (match_operand:SI 2 "nonmemory_operand" "")))] | |
4752 | "" | |
4753 | " | |
4754 | @end group | |
4755 | @end smallexample | |
4756 | ||
4757 | @smallexample | |
4758 | @group | |
4759 | @{ | |
4760 | if (GET_CODE (operands[2]) != CONST_INT | |
4761 | || (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) > 3) | |
4762 | FAIL; | |
4763 | @}") | |
4764 | @end group | |
4765 | @end smallexample | |
4766 | ||
4767 | @noindent | |
4768 | This example uses @code{define_expand} so that it can generate an RTL insn | |
4769 | for shifting when the shift-count is in the supported range of 0 to 3 but | |
4770 | fail in other cases where machine insns aren't available. When it fails, | |
4771 | the compiler tries another strategy using different patterns (such as, a | |
4772 | library call). | |
4773 | ||
4774 | If the compiler were able to handle nontrivial condition-strings in | |
4775 | patterns with names, then it would be possible to use a | |
4776 | @code{define_insn} in that case. Here is another case (zero-extension | |
4777 | on the 68000) which makes more use of the power of @code{define_expand}: | |
4778 | ||
4779 | @smallexample | |
4780 | (define_expand "zero_extendhisi2" | |
4781 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "") | |
4782 | (const_int 0)) | |
4783 | (set (strict_low_part | |
4784 | (subreg:HI | |
4785 | (match_dup 0) | |
4786 | 0)) | |
4787 | (match_operand:HI 1 "general_operand" ""))] | |
4788 | "" | |
4789 | "operands[1] = make_safe_from (operands[1], operands[0]);") | |
4790 | @end smallexample | |
4791 | ||
4792 | @noindent | |
4793 | @findex make_safe_from | |
4794 | Here two RTL insns are generated, one to clear the entire output operand | |
4795 | and the other to copy the input operand into its low half. This sequence | |
4796 | is incorrect if the input operand refers to [the old value of] the output | |
4797 | operand, so the preparation statement makes sure this isn't so. The | |
4798 | function @code{make_safe_from} copies the @code{operands[1]} into a | |
4799 | temporary register if it refers to @code{operands[0]}. It does this | |
4800 | by emitting another RTL insn. | |
4801 | ||
4802 | Finally, a third example shows the use of an internal operand. | |
4803 | Zero-extension on the SPUR chip is done by @code{and}-ing the result | |
4804 | against a halfword mask. But this mask cannot be represented by a | |
4805 | @code{const_int} because the constant value is too large to be legitimate | |
4806 | on this machine. So it must be copied into a register with | |
4807 | @code{force_reg} and then the register used in the @code{and}. | |
4808 | ||
4809 | @smallexample | |
4810 | (define_expand "zero_extendhisi2" | |
4811 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") | |
4812 | (and:SI (subreg:SI | |
4813 | (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "") | |
4814 | 0) | |
4815 | (match_dup 2)))] | |
4816 | "" | |
4817 | "operands[2] | |
3a598fbe | 4818 | = force_reg (SImode, GEN_INT (65535)); ") |
03dda8e3 RK |
4819 | @end smallexample |
4820 | ||
f4559287 | 4821 | @emph{Note:} If the @code{define_expand} is used to serve a |
c771326b | 4822 | standard binary or unary arithmetic operation or a bit-field operation, |
03dda8e3 RK |
4823 | then the last insn it generates must not be a @code{code_label}, |
4824 | @code{barrier} or @code{note}. It must be an @code{insn}, | |
4825 | @code{jump_insn} or @code{call_insn}. If you don't need a real insn | |
4826 | at the end, emit an insn to copy the result of the operation into | |
4827 | itself. Such an insn will generate no code, but it can avoid problems | |
bd819a4a | 4828 | in the compiler. |
03dda8e3 | 4829 | |
a5249a21 HPN |
4830 | @end ifset |
4831 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4832 | @node Insn Splitting |
4833 | @section Defining How to Split Instructions | |
4834 | @cindex insn splitting | |
4835 | @cindex instruction splitting | |
4836 | @cindex splitting instructions | |
4837 | ||
fae15c93 VM |
4838 | There are two cases where you should specify how to split a pattern |
4839 | into multiple insns. On machines that have instructions requiring | |
4840 | delay slots (@pxref{Delay Slots}) or that have instructions whose | |
4841 | output is not available for multiple cycles (@pxref{Processor pipeline | |
4842 | description}), the compiler phases that optimize these cases need to | |
4843 | be able to move insns into one-instruction delay slots. However, some | |
4844 | insns may generate more than one machine instruction. These insns | |
4845 | cannot be placed into a delay slot. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4846 | |
4847 | Often you can rewrite the single insn as a list of individual insns, | |
4848 | each corresponding to one machine instruction. The disadvantage of | |
4849 | doing so is that it will cause the compilation to be slower and require | |
4850 | more space. If the resulting insns are too complex, it may also | |
4851 | suppress some optimizations. The compiler splits the insn if there is a | |
4852 | reason to believe that it might improve instruction or delay slot | |
4853 | scheduling. | |
4854 | ||
4855 | The insn combiner phase also splits putative insns. If three insns are | |
4856 | merged into one insn with a complex expression that cannot be matched by | |
4857 | some @code{define_insn} pattern, the combiner phase attempts to split | |
4858 | the complex pattern into two insns that are recognized. Usually it can | |
4859 | break the complex pattern into two patterns by splitting out some | |
4860 | subexpression. However, in some other cases, such as performing an | |
4861 | addition of a large constant in two insns on a RISC machine, the way to | |
4862 | split the addition into two insns is machine-dependent. | |
4863 | ||
f3a3d0d3 | 4864 | @findex define_split |
03dda8e3 RK |
4865 | The @code{define_split} definition tells the compiler how to split a |
4866 | complex insn into several simpler insns. It looks like this: | |
4867 | ||
4868 | @smallexample | |
4869 | (define_split | |
4870 | [@var{insn-pattern}] | |
4871 | "@var{condition}" | |
4872 | [@var{new-insn-pattern-1} | |
4873 | @var{new-insn-pattern-2} | |
4874 | @dots{}] | |
630d3d5a | 4875 | "@var{preparation-statements}") |
03dda8e3 RK |
4876 | @end smallexample |
4877 | ||
4878 | @var{insn-pattern} is a pattern that needs to be split and | |
4879 | @var{condition} is the final condition to be tested, as in a | |
4880 | @code{define_insn}. When an insn matching @var{insn-pattern} and | |
4881 | satisfying @var{condition} is found, it is replaced in the insn list | |
4882 | with the insns given by @var{new-insn-pattern-1}, | |
4883 | @var{new-insn-pattern-2}, etc. | |
4884 | ||
630d3d5a | 4885 | The @var{preparation-statements} are similar to those statements that |
03dda8e3 RK |
4886 | are specified for @code{define_expand} (@pxref{Expander Definitions}) |
4887 | and are executed before the new RTL is generated to prepare for the | |
4888 | generated code or emit some insns whose pattern is not fixed. Unlike | |
4889 | those in @code{define_expand}, however, these statements must not | |
4890 | generate any new pseudo-registers. Once reload has completed, they also | |
4891 | must not allocate any space in the stack frame. | |
4892 | ||
4893 | Patterns are matched against @var{insn-pattern} in two different | |
4894 | circumstances. If an insn needs to be split for delay slot scheduling | |
4895 | or insn scheduling, the insn is already known to be valid, which means | |
4896 | that it must have been matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if | |
df2a54e9 | 4897 | @code{reload_completed} is nonzero, is known to satisfy the constraints |
03dda8e3 RK |
4898 | of that @code{define_insn}. In that case, the new insn patterns must |
4899 | also be insns that are matched by some @code{define_insn} and, if | |
df2a54e9 | 4900 | @code{reload_completed} is nonzero, must also satisfy the constraints |
03dda8e3 RK |
4901 | of those definitions. |
4902 | ||
4903 | As an example of this usage of @code{define_split}, consider the following | |
4904 | example from @file{a29k.md}, which splits a @code{sign_extend} from | |
4905 | @code{HImode} to @code{SImode} into a pair of shift insns: | |
4906 | ||
4907 | @smallexample | |
4908 | (define_split | |
4909 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "") | |
4910 | (sign_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "")))] | |
4911 | "" | |
4912 | [(set (match_dup 0) | |
4913 | (ashift:SI (match_dup 1) | |
4914 | (const_int 16))) | |
4915 | (set (match_dup 0) | |
4916 | (ashiftrt:SI (match_dup 0) | |
4917 | (const_int 16)))] | |
4918 | " | |
4919 | @{ operands[1] = gen_lowpart (SImode, operands[1]); @}") | |
4920 | @end smallexample | |
4921 | ||
4922 | When the combiner phase tries to split an insn pattern, it is always the | |
4923 | case that the pattern is @emph{not} matched by any @code{define_insn}. | |
4924 | The combiner pass first tries to split a single @code{set} expression | |
4925 | and then the same @code{set} expression inside a @code{parallel}, but | |
4926 | followed by a @code{clobber} of a pseudo-reg to use as a scratch | |
4927 | register. In these cases, the combiner expects exactly two new insn | |
4928 | patterns to be generated. It will verify that these patterns match some | |
4929 | @code{define_insn} definitions, so you need not do this test in the | |
4930 | @code{define_split} (of course, there is no point in writing a | |
4931 | @code{define_split} that will never produce insns that match). | |
4932 | ||
4933 | Here is an example of this use of @code{define_split}, taken from | |
4934 | @file{rs6000.md}: | |
4935 | ||
4936 | @smallexample | |
4937 | (define_split | |
4938 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "gen_reg_operand" "") | |
4939 | (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "") | |
4940 | (match_operand:SI 2 "non_add_cint_operand" "")))] | |
4941 | "" | |
4942 | [(set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 3))) | |
4943 | (set (match_dup 0) (plus:SI (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)))] | |
4944 | " | |
4945 | @{ | |
4946 | int low = INTVAL (operands[2]) & 0xffff; | |
4947 | int high = (unsigned) INTVAL (operands[2]) >> 16; | |
4948 | ||
4949 | if (low & 0x8000) | |
4950 | high++, low |= 0xffff0000; | |
4951 | ||
3a598fbe JL |
4952 | operands[3] = GEN_INT (high << 16); |
4953 | operands[4] = GEN_INT (low); | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4954 | @}") |
4955 | @end smallexample | |
4956 | ||
4957 | Here the predicate @code{non_add_cint_operand} matches any | |
4958 | @code{const_int} that is @emph{not} a valid operand of a single add | |
4959 | insn. The add with the smaller displacement is written so that it | |
4960 | can be substituted into the address of a subsequent operation. | |
4961 | ||
4962 | An example that uses a scratch register, from the same file, generates | |
4963 | an equality comparison of a register and a large constant: | |
4964 | ||
4965 | @smallexample | |
4966 | (define_split | |
4967 | [(set (match_operand:CC 0 "cc_reg_operand" "") | |
4968 | (compare:CC (match_operand:SI 1 "gen_reg_operand" "") | |
4969 | (match_operand:SI 2 "non_short_cint_operand" ""))) | |
4970 | (clobber (match_operand:SI 3 "gen_reg_operand" ""))] | |
4971 | "find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0) | |
4972 | && (GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == EQ | |
4973 | || GET_CODE (*find_single_use (operands[0], insn, 0)) == NE)" | |
4974 | [(set (match_dup 3) (xor:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 4))) | |
4975 | (set (match_dup 0) (compare:CC (match_dup 3) (match_dup 5)))] | |
4976 | " | |
4977 | @{ | |
12bcfaa1 | 4978 | /* @r{Get the constant we are comparing against, C, and see what it |
03dda8e3 | 4979 | looks like sign-extended to 16 bits. Then see what constant |
12bcfaa1 | 4980 | could be XOR'ed with C to get the sign-extended value.} */ |
03dda8e3 RK |
4981 | |
4982 | int c = INTVAL (operands[2]); | |
4983 | int sextc = (c << 16) >> 16; | |
4984 | int xorv = c ^ sextc; | |
4985 | ||
3a598fbe JL |
4986 | operands[4] = GEN_INT (xorv); |
4987 | operands[5] = GEN_INT (sextc); | |
03dda8e3 RK |
4988 | @}") |
4989 | @end smallexample | |
4990 | ||
4991 | To avoid confusion, don't write a single @code{define_split} that | |
4992 | accepts some insns that match some @code{define_insn} as well as some | |
4993 | insns that don't. Instead, write two separate @code{define_split} | |
4994 | definitions, one for the insns that are valid and one for the insns that | |
4995 | are not valid. | |
4996 | ||
6b24c259 JH |
4997 | The splitter is allowed to split jump instructions into sequence of |
4998 | jumps or create new jumps in while splitting non-jump instructions. As | |
4999 | the central flowgraph and branch prediction information needs to be updated, | |
f282ffb3 | 5000 | several restriction apply. |
6b24c259 JH |
5001 | |
5002 | Splitting of jump instruction into sequence that over by another jump | |
c21cd8b1 | 5003 | instruction is always valid, as compiler expect identical behavior of new |
6b24c259 JH |
5004 | jump. When new sequence contains multiple jump instructions or new labels, |
5005 | more assistance is needed. Splitter is required to create only unconditional | |
5006 | jumps, or simple conditional jump instructions. Additionally it must attach a | |
63519d23 | 5007 | @code{REG_BR_PROB} note to each conditional jump. A global variable |
addd6f64 | 5008 | @code{split_branch_probability} holds the probability of the original branch in case |
6b24c259 | 5009 | it was an simple conditional jump, @minus{}1 otherwise. To simplify |
addd6f64 | 5010 | recomputing of edge frequencies, the new sequence is required to have only |
6b24c259 JH |
5011 | forward jumps to the newly created labels. |
5012 | ||
fae81b38 | 5013 | @findex define_insn_and_split |
c88c0d42 CP |
5014 | For the common case where the pattern of a define_split exactly matches the |
5015 | pattern of a define_insn, use @code{define_insn_and_split}. It looks like | |
5016 | this: | |
5017 | ||
5018 | @smallexample | |
5019 | (define_insn_and_split | |
5020 | [@var{insn-pattern}] | |
5021 | "@var{condition}" | |
5022 | "@var{output-template}" | |
5023 | "@var{split-condition}" | |
5024 | [@var{new-insn-pattern-1} | |
5025 | @var{new-insn-pattern-2} | |
5026 | @dots{}] | |
630d3d5a | 5027 | "@var{preparation-statements}" |
c88c0d42 CP |
5028 | [@var{insn-attributes}]) |
5029 | ||
5030 | @end smallexample | |
5031 | ||
5032 | @var{insn-pattern}, @var{condition}, @var{output-template}, and | |
5033 | @var{insn-attributes} are used as in @code{define_insn}. The | |
5034 | @var{new-insn-pattern} vector and the @var{preparation-statements} are used as | |
5035 | in a @code{define_split}. The @var{split-condition} is also used as in | |
5036 | @code{define_split}, with the additional behavior that if the condition starts | |
5037 | with @samp{&&}, the condition used for the split will be the constructed as a | |
d7d9c429 | 5038 | logical ``and'' of the split condition with the insn condition. For example, |
c88c0d42 CP |
5039 | from i386.md: |
5040 | ||
5041 | @smallexample | |
5042 | (define_insn_and_split "zero_extendhisi2_and" | |
5043 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=r") | |
5044 | (zero_extend:SI (match_operand:HI 1 "register_operand" "0"))) | |
5045 | (clobber (reg:CC 17))] | |
5046 | "TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size" | |
5047 | "#" | |
5048 | "&& reload_completed" | |
f282ffb3 | 5049 | [(parallel [(set (match_dup 0) |
9c34dbbf | 5050 | (and:SI (match_dup 0) (const_int 65535))) |
c88c0d42 CP |
5051 | (clobber (reg:CC 17))])] |
5052 | "" | |
5053 | [(set_attr "type" "alu1")]) | |
5054 | ||
5055 | @end smallexample | |
5056 | ||
ebb48a4d | 5057 | In this case, the actual split condition will be |
aee96fe9 | 5058 | @samp{TARGET_ZERO_EXTEND_WITH_AND && !optimize_size && reload_completed}. |
c88c0d42 CP |
5059 | |
5060 | The @code{define_insn_and_split} construction provides exactly the same | |
5061 | functionality as two separate @code{define_insn} and @code{define_split} | |
5062 | patterns. It exists for compactness, and as a maintenance tool to prevent | |
5063 | having to ensure the two patterns' templates match. | |
5064 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5065 | @end ifset |
5066 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
04d8aa70 AM |
5067 | @node Including Patterns |
5068 | @section Including Patterns in Machine Descriptions. | |
5069 | @cindex insn includes | |
5070 | ||
5071 | @findex include | |
5072 | The @code{include} pattern tells the compiler tools where to | |
5073 | look for patterns that are in files other than in the file | |
8a36672b | 5074 | @file{.md}. This is used only at build time and there is no preprocessing allowed. |
04d8aa70 AM |
5075 | |
5076 | It looks like: | |
5077 | ||
5078 | @smallexample | |
5079 | ||
5080 | (include | |
5081 | @var{pathname}) | |
5082 | @end smallexample | |
5083 | ||
5084 | For example: | |
5085 | ||
5086 | @smallexample | |
5087 | ||
f282ffb3 | 5088 | (include "filestuff") |
04d8aa70 AM |
5089 | |
5090 | @end smallexample | |
5091 | ||
27d30956 | 5092 | Where @var{pathname} is a string that specifies the location of the file, |
8a36672b | 5093 | specifies the include file to be in @file{gcc/config/target/filestuff}. The |
04d8aa70 AM |
5094 | directory @file{gcc/config/target} is regarded as the default directory. |
5095 | ||
5096 | ||
f282ffb3 JM |
5097 | Machine descriptions may be split up into smaller more manageable subsections |
5098 | and placed into subdirectories. | |
04d8aa70 AM |
5099 | |
5100 | By specifying: | |
5101 | ||
5102 | @smallexample | |
5103 | ||
f282ffb3 | 5104 | (include "BOGUS/filestuff") |
04d8aa70 AM |
5105 | |
5106 | @end smallexample | |
5107 | ||
5108 | the include file is specified to be in @file{gcc/config/@var{target}/BOGUS/filestuff}. | |
5109 | ||
5110 | Specifying an absolute path for the include file such as; | |
5111 | @smallexample | |
5112 | ||
f282ffb3 | 5113 | (include "/u2/BOGUS/filestuff") |
04d8aa70 AM |
5114 | |
5115 | @end smallexample | |
f282ffb3 | 5116 | is permitted but is not encouraged. |
04d8aa70 AM |
5117 | |
5118 | @subsection RTL Generation Tool Options for Directory Search | |
5119 | @cindex directory options .md | |
5120 | @cindex options, directory search | |
5121 | @cindex search options | |
5122 | ||
5123 | The @option{-I@var{dir}} option specifies directories to search for machine descriptions. | |
5124 | For example: | |
5125 | ||
5126 | @smallexample | |
5127 | ||
5128 | genrecog -I/p1/abc/proc1 -I/p2/abcd/pro2 target.md | |
5129 | ||
5130 | @end smallexample | |
5131 | ||
5132 | ||
5133 | Add the directory @var{dir} to the head of the list of directories to be | |
5134 | searched for header files. This can be used to override a system machine definition | |
5135 | file, substituting your own version, since these directories are | |
5136 | searched before the default machine description file directories. If you use more than | |
5137 | one @option{-I} option, the directories are scanned in left-to-right | |
5138 | order; the standard default directory come after. | |
5139 | ||
5140 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5141 | @end ifset |
5142 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5143 | @node Peephole Definitions |
5144 | @section Machine-Specific Peephole Optimizers | |
5145 | @cindex peephole optimizer definitions | |
5146 | @cindex defining peephole optimizers | |
5147 | ||
5148 | In addition to instruction patterns the @file{md} file may contain | |
5149 | definitions of machine-specific peephole optimizations. | |
5150 | ||
5151 | The combiner does not notice certain peephole optimizations when the data | |
5152 | flow in the program does not suggest that it should try them. For example, | |
5153 | sometimes two consecutive insns related in purpose can be combined even | |
5154 | though the second one does not appear to use a register computed in the | |
5155 | first one. A machine-specific peephole optimizer can detect such | |
5156 | opportunities. | |
5157 | ||
5158 | There are two forms of peephole definitions that may be used. The | |
5159 | original @code{define_peephole} is run at assembly output time to | |
5160 | match insns and substitute assembly text. Use of @code{define_peephole} | |
5161 | is deprecated. | |
5162 | ||
5163 | A newer @code{define_peephole2} matches insns and substitutes new | |
5164 | insns. The @code{peephole2} pass is run after register allocation | |
ebb48a4d | 5165 | but before scheduling, which may result in much better code for |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5166 | targets that do scheduling. |
5167 | ||
5168 | @menu | |
5169 | * define_peephole:: RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers | |
5170 | * define_peephole2:: RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers | |
5171 | @end menu | |
5172 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5173 | @end ifset |
5174 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5175 | @node define_peephole |
5176 | @subsection RTL to Text Peephole Optimizers | |
5177 | @findex define_peephole | |
5178 | ||
5179 | @need 1000 | |
5180 | A definition looks like this: | |
5181 | ||
5182 | @smallexample | |
5183 | (define_peephole | |
5184 | [@var{insn-pattern-1} | |
5185 | @var{insn-pattern-2} | |
5186 | @dots{}] | |
5187 | "@var{condition}" | |
5188 | "@var{template}" | |
630d3d5a | 5189 | "@var{optional-insn-attributes}") |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5190 | @end smallexample |
5191 | ||
5192 | @noindent | |
5193 | The last string operand may be omitted if you are not using any | |
5194 | machine-specific information in this machine description. If present, | |
5195 | it must obey the same rules as in a @code{define_insn}. | |
5196 | ||
5197 | In this skeleton, @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on are patterns to match | |
5198 | consecutive insns. The optimization applies to a sequence of insns when | |
5199 | @var{insn-pattern-1} matches the first one, @var{insn-pattern-2} matches | |
bd819a4a | 5200 | the next, and so on. |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5201 | |
5202 | Each of the insns matched by a peephole must also match a | |
5203 | @code{define_insn}. Peepholes are checked only at the last stage just | |
5204 | before code generation, and only optionally. Therefore, any insn which | |
5205 | would match a peephole but no @code{define_insn} will cause a crash in code | |
5206 | generation in an unoptimized compilation, or at various optimization | |
5207 | stages. | |
5208 | ||
5209 | The operands of the insns are matched with @code{match_operands}, | |
5210 | @code{match_operator}, and @code{match_dup}, as usual. What is not | |
5211 | usual is that the operand numbers apply to all the insn patterns in the | |
5212 | definition. So, you can check for identical operands in two insns by | |
5213 | using @code{match_operand} in one insn and @code{match_dup} in the | |
5214 | other. | |
5215 | ||
5216 | The operand constraints used in @code{match_operand} patterns do not have | |
5217 | any direct effect on the applicability of the peephole, but they will | |
5218 | be validated afterward, so make sure your constraints are general enough | |
5219 | to apply whenever the peephole matches. If the peephole matches | |
5220 | but the constraints are not satisfied, the compiler will crash. | |
5221 | ||
5222 | It is safe to omit constraints in all the operands of the peephole; or | |
5223 | you can write constraints which serve as a double-check on the criteria | |
5224 | previously tested. | |
5225 | ||
5226 | Once a sequence of insns matches the patterns, the @var{condition} is | |
5227 | checked. This is a C expression which makes the final decision whether to | |
5228 | perform the optimization (we do so if the expression is nonzero). If | |
5229 | @var{condition} is omitted (in other words, the string is empty) then the | |
5230 | optimization is applied to every sequence of insns that matches the | |
5231 | patterns. | |
5232 | ||
5233 | The defined peephole optimizations are applied after register allocation | |
5234 | is complete. Therefore, the peephole definition can check which | |
5235 | operands have ended up in which kinds of registers, just by looking at | |
5236 | the operands. | |
5237 | ||
5238 | @findex prev_active_insn | |
5239 | The way to refer to the operands in @var{condition} is to write | |
5240 | @code{operands[@var{i}]} for operand number @var{i} (as matched by | |
5241 | @code{(match_operand @var{i} @dots{})}). Use the variable @code{insn} | |
5242 | to refer to the last of the insns being matched; use | |
5243 | @code{prev_active_insn} to find the preceding insns. | |
5244 | ||
5245 | @findex dead_or_set_p | |
5246 | When optimizing computations with intermediate results, you can use | |
5247 | @var{condition} to match only when the intermediate results are not used | |
5248 | elsewhere. Use the C expression @code{dead_or_set_p (@var{insn}, | |
5249 | @var{op})}, where @var{insn} is the insn in which you expect the value | |
5250 | to be used for the last time (from the value of @code{insn}, together | |
5251 | with use of @code{prev_nonnote_insn}), and @var{op} is the intermediate | |
bd819a4a | 5252 | value (from @code{operands[@var{i}]}). |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5253 | |
5254 | Applying the optimization means replacing the sequence of insns with one | |
5255 | new insn. The @var{template} controls ultimate output of assembler code | |
5256 | for this combined insn. It works exactly like the template of a | |
5257 | @code{define_insn}. Operand numbers in this template are the same ones | |
5258 | used in matching the original sequence of insns. | |
5259 | ||
5260 | The result of a defined peephole optimizer does not need to match any of | |
5261 | the insn patterns in the machine description; it does not even have an | |
5262 | opportunity to match them. The peephole optimizer definition itself serves | |
5263 | as the insn pattern to control how the insn is output. | |
5264 | ||
5265 | Defined peephole optimizers are run as assembler code is being output, | |
5266 | so the insns they produce are never combined or rearranged in any way. | |
5267 | ||
5268 | Here is an example, taken from the 68000 machine description: | |
5269 | ||
5270 | @smallexample | |
5271 | (define_peephole | |
5272 | [(set (reg:SI 15) (plus:SI (reg:SI 15) (const_int 4))) | |
5273 | (set (match_operand:DF 0 "register_operand" "=f") | |
5274 | (match_operand:DF 1 "register_operand" "ad"))] | |
5275 | "FP_REG_P (operands[0]) && ! FP_REG_P (operands[1])" | |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5276 | @{ |
5277 | rtx xoperands[2]; | |
a2a8cc44 | 5278 | xoperands[1] = gen_rtx_REG (SImode, REGNO (operands[1]) + 1); |
f3a3d0d3 | 5279 | #ifdef MOTOROLA |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
5280 | output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,(sp)", xoperands); |
5281 | output_asm_insn ("move.l %1,-(sp)", operands); | |
5282 | return "fmove.d (sp)+,%0"; | |
f3a3d0d3 | 5283 | #else |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
5284 | output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@", xoperands); |
5285 | output_asm_insn ("movel %1,sp@@-", operands); | |
5286 | return "fmoved sp@@+,%0"; | |
f3a3d0d3 | 5287 | #endif |
0f40f9f7 | 5288 | @}) |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5289 | @end smallexample |
5290 | ||
5291 | @need 1000 | |
5292 | The effect of this optimization is to change | |
5293 | ||
5294 | @smallexample | |
5295 | @group | |
5296 | jbsr _foobar | |
5297 | addql #4,sp | |
5298 | movel d1,sp@@- | |
5299 | movel d0,sp@@- | |
5300 | fmoved sp@@+,fp0 | |
5301 | @end group | |
5302 | @end smallexample | |
5303 | ||
5304 | @noindent | |
5305 | into | |
5306 | ||
5307 | @smallexample | |
5308 | @group | |
5309 | jbsr _foobar | |
5310 | movel d1,sp@@ | |
5311 | movel d0,sp@@- | |
5312 | fmoved sp@@+,fp0 | |
5313 | @end group | |
5314 | @end smallexample | |
5315 | ||
5316 | @ignore | |
5317 | @findex CC_REVERSED | |
5318 | If a peephole matches a sequence including one or more jump insns, you must | |
5319 | take account of the flags such as @code{CC_REVERSED} which specify that the | |
5320 | condition codes are represented in an unusual manner. The compiler | |
5321 | automatically alters any ordinary conditional jumps which occur in such | |
5322 | situations, but the compiler cannot alter jumps which have been replaced by | |
5323 | peephole optimizations. So it is up to you to alter the assembler code | |
5324 | that the peephole produces. Supply C code to write the assembler output, | |
5325 | and in this C code check the condition code status flags and change the | |
5326 | assembler code as appropriate. | |
5327 | @end ignore | |
5328 | ||
5329 | @var{insn-pattern-1} and so on look @emph{almost} like the second | |
5330 | operand of @code{define_insn}. There is one important difference: the | |
5331 | second operand of @code{define_insn} consists of one or more RTX's | |
5332 | enclosed in square brackets. Usually, there is only one: then the same | |
5333 | action can be written as an element of a @code{define_peephole}. But | |
5334 | when there are multiple actions in a @code{define_insn}, they are | |
5335 | implicitly enclosed in a @code{parallel}. Then you must explicitly | |
5336 | write the @code{parallel}, and the square brackets within it, in the | |
5337 | @code{define_peephole}. Thus, if an insn pattern looks like this, | |
5338 | ||
5339 | @smallexample | |
5340 | (define_insn "divmodsi4" | |
5341 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d") | |
5342 | (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0") | |
5343 | (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK"))) | |
5344 | (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d") | |
5345 | (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))] | |
5346 | "TARGET_68020" | |
5347 | "divsl%.l %2,%3:%0") | |
5348 | @end smallexample | |
5349 | ||
5350 | @noindent | |
5351 | then the way to mention this insn in a peephole is as follows: | |
5352 | ||
5353 | @smallexample | |
5354 | (define_peephole | |
5355 | [@dots{} | |
5356 | (parallel | |
5357 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=d") | |
5358 | (div:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "0") | |
5359 | (match_operand:SI 2 "general_operand" "dmsK"))) | |
5360 | (set (match_operand:SI 3 "general_operand" "=d") | |
5361 | (mod:SI (match_dup 1) (match_dup 2)))]) | |
5362 | @dots{}] | |
5363 | @dots{}) | |
5364 | @end smallexample | |
5365 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5366 | @end ifset |
5367 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5368 | @node define_peephole2 |
5369 | @subsection RTL to RTL Peephole Optimizers | |
5370 | @findex define_peephole2 | |
5371 | ||
5372 | The @code{define_peephole2} definition tells the compiler how to | |
ebb48a4d | 5373 | substitute one sequence of instructions for another sequence, |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5374 | what additional scratch registers may be needed and what their |
5375 | lifetimes must be. | |
5376 | ||
5377 | @smallexample | |
5378 | (define_peephole2 | |
5379 | [@var{insn-pattern-1} | |
5380 | @var{insn-pattern-2} | |
5381 | @dots{}] | |
5382 | "@var{condition}" | |
5383 | [@var{new-insn-pattern-1} | |
5384 | @var{new-insn-pattern-2} | |
5385 | @dots{}] | |
630d3d5a | 5386 | "@var{preparation-statements}") |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5387 | @end smallexample |
5388 | ||
5389 | The definition is almost identical to @code{define_split} | |
5390 | (@pxref{Insn Splitting}) except that the pattern to match is not a | |
5391 | single instruction, but a sequence of instructions. | |
5392 | ||
5393 | It is possible to request additional scratch registers for use in the | |
5394 | output template. If appropriate registers are not free, the pattern | |
5395 | will simply not match. | |
5396 | ||
5397 | @findex match_scratch | |
5398 | @findex match_dup | |
5399 | Scratch registers are requested with a @code{match_scratch} pattern at | |
5400 | the top level of the input pattern. The allocated register (initially) will | |
5401 | be dead at the point requested within the original sequence. If the scratch | |
5402 | is used at more than a single point, a @code{match_dup} pattern at the | |
5403 | top level of the input pattern marks the last position in the input sequence | |
5404 | at which the register must be available. | |
5405 | ||
5406 | Here is an example from the IA-32 machine description: | |
5407 | ||
5408 | @smallexample | |
5409 | (define_peephole2 | |
5410 | [(match_scratch:SI 2 "r") | |
5411 | (parallel [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "") | |
5412 | (match_operator:SI 3 "arith_or_logical_operator" | |
5413 | [(match_dup 0) | |
5414 | (match_operand:SI 1 "memory_operand" "")])) | |
5415 | (clobber (reg:CC 17))])] | |
5416 | "! optimize_size && ! TARGET_READ_MODIFY" | |
5417 | [(set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 1)) | |
5418 | (parallel [(set (match_dup 0) | |
5419 | (match_op_dup 3 [(match_dup 0) (match_dup 2)])) | |
5420 | (clobber (reg:CC 17))])] | |
5421 | "") | |
5422 | @end smallexample | |
5423 | ||
5424 | @noindent | |
5425 | This pattern tries to split a load from its use in the hopes that we'll be | |
5426 | able to schedule around the memory load latency. It allocates a single | |
5427 | @code{SImode} register of class @code{GENERAL_REGS} (@code{"r"}) that needs | |
5428 | to be live only at the point just before the arithmetic. | |
5429 | ||
b192711e | 5430 | A real example requiring extended scratch lifetimes is harder to come by, |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5431 | so here's a silly made-up example: |
5432 | ||
5433 | @smallexample | |
5434 | (define_peephole2 | |
5435 | [(match_scratch:SI 4 "r") | |
5436 | (set (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") (match_operand:SI 1 "" "")) | |
5437 | (set (match_operand:SI 2 "" "") (match_dup 1)) | |
5438 | (match_dup 4) | |
5439 | (set (match_operand:SI 3 "" "") (match_dup 1))] | |
630d3d5a | 5440 | "/* @r{determine 1 does not overlap 0 and 2} */" |
f3a3d0d3 RH |
5441 | [(set (match_dup 4) (match_dup 1)) |
5442 | (set (match_dup 0) (match_dup 4)) | |
5443 | (set (match_dup 2) (match_dup 4))] | |
5444 | (set (match_dup 3) (match_dup 4))] | |
5445 | "") | |
5446 | @end smallexample | |
5447 | ||
5448 | @noindent | |
a628d195 RH |
5449 | If we had not added the @code{(match_dup 4)} in the middle of the input |
5450 | sequence, it might have been the case that the register we chose at the | |
5451 | beginning of the sequence is killed by the first or second @code{set}. | |
f3a3d0d3 | 5452 | |
a5249a21 HPN |
5453 | @end ifset |
5454 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5455 | @node Insn Attributes |
5456 | @section Instruction Attributes | |
5457 | @cindex insn attributes | |
5458 | @cindex instruction attributes | |
5459 | ||
5460 | In addition to describing the instruction supported by the target machine, | |
5461 | the @file{md} file also defines a group of @dfn{attributes} and a set of | |
5462 | values for each. Every generated insn is assigned a value for each attribute. | |
5463 | One possible attribute would be the effect that the insn has on the machine's | |
5464 | condition code. This attribute can then be used by @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} | |
5465 | to track the condition codes. | |
5466 | ||
5467 | @menu | |
5468 | * Defining Attributes:: Specifying attributes and their values. | |
5469 | * Expressions:: Valid expressions for attribute values. | |
5470 | * Tagging Insns:: Assigning attribute values to insns. | |
5471 | * Attr Example:: An example of assigning attributes. | |
5472 | * Insn Lengths:: Computing the length of insns. | |
5473 | * Constant Attributes:: Defining attributes that are constant. | |
5474 | * Delay Slots:: Defining delay slots required for a machine. | |
fae15c93 | 5475 | * Processor pipeline description:: Specifying information for insn scheduling. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5476 | @end menu |
5477 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5478 | @end ifset |
5479 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5480 | @node Defining Attributes |
5481 | @subsection Defining Attributes and their Values | |
5482 | @cindex defining attributes and their values | |
5483 | @cindex attributes, defining | |
5484 | ||
5485 | @findex define_attr | |
5486 | The @code{define_attr} expression is used to define each attribute required | |
5487 | by the target machine. It looks like: | |
5488 | ||
5489 | @smallexample | |
5490 | (define_attr @var{name} @var{list-of-values} @var{default}) | |
5491 | @end smallexample | |
5492 | ||
5493 | @var{name} is a string specifying the name of the attribute being defined. | |
5494 | ||
5495 | @var{list-of-values} is either a string that specifies a comma-separated | |
5496 | list of values that can be assigned to the attribute, or a null string to | |
5497 | indicate that the attribute takes numeric values. | |
5498 | ||
5499 | @var{default} is an attribute expression that gives the value of this | |
5500 | attribute for insns that match patterns whose definition does not include | |
5501 | an explicit value for this attribute. @xref{Attr Example}, for more | |
5502 | information on the handling of defaults. @xref{Constant Attributes}, | |
5503 | for information on attributes that do not depend on any particular insn. | |
5504 | ||
5505 | @findex insn-attr.h | |
5506 | For each defined attribute, a number of definitions are written to the | |
5507 | @file{insn-attr.h} file. For cases where an explicit set of values is | |
5508 | specified for an attribute, the following are defined: | |
5509 | ||
5510 | @itemize @bullet | |
5511 | @item | |
5512 | A @samp{#define} is written for the symbol @samp{HAVE_ATTR_@var{name}}. | |
5513 | ||
5514 | @item | |
2eac577f | 5515 | An enumerated class is defined for @samp{attr_@var{name}} with |
03dda8e3 | 5516 | elements of the form @samp{@var{upper-name}_@var{upper-value}} where |
4bd0bee9 | 5517 | the attribute name and value are first converted to uppercase. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5518 | |
5519 | @item | |
5520 | A function @samp{get_attr_@var{name}} is defined that is passed an insn and | |
5521 | returns the attribute value for that insn. | |
5522 | @end itemize | |
5523 | ||
5524 | For example, if the following is present in the @file{md} file: | |
5525 | ||
5526 | @smallexample | |
5527 | (define_attr "type" "branch,fp,load,store,arith" @dots{}) | |
5528 | @end smallexample | |
5529 | ||
5530 | @noindent | |
5531 | the following lines will be written to the file @file{insn-attr.h}. | |
5532 | ||
5533 | @smallexample | |
5534 | #define HAVE_ATTR_type | |
5535 | enum attr_type @{TYPE_BRANCH, TYPE_FP, TYPE_LOAD, | |
5536 | TYPE_STORE, TYPE_ARITH@}; | |
5537 | extern enum attr_type get_attr_type (); | |
5538 | @end smallexample | |
5539 | ||
5540 | If the attribute takes numeric values, no @code{enum} type will be | |
5541 | defined and the function to obtain the attribute's value will return | |
5542 | @code{int}. | |
5543 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5544 | @end ifset |
5545 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5546 | @node Expressions |
5547 | @subsection Attribute Expressions | |
5548 | @cindex attribute expressions | |
5549 | ||
5550 | RTL expressions used to define attributes use the codes described above | |
5551 | plus a few specific to attribute definitions, to be discussed below. | |
5552 | Attribute value expressions must have one of the following forms: | |
5553 | ||
5554 | @table @code | |
5555 | @cindex @code{const_int} and attributes | |
5556 | @item (const_int @var{i}) | |
5557 | The integer @var{i} specifies the value of a numeric attribute. @var{i} | |
5558 | must be non-negative. | |
5559 | ||
5560 | The value of a numeric attribute can be specified either with a | |
00bc45c1 RH |
5561 | @code{const_int}, or as an integer represented as a string in |
5562 | @code{const_string}, @code{eq_attr} (see below), @code{attr}, | |
5563 | @code{symbol_ref}, simple arithmetic expressions, and @code{set_attr} | |
5564 | overrides on specific instructions (@pxref{Tagging Insns}). | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5565 | |
5566 | @cindex @code{const_string} and attributes | |
5567 | @item (const_string @var{value}) | |
5568 | The string @var{value} specifies a constant attribute value. | |
5569 | If @var{value} is specified as @samp{"*"}, it means that the default value of | |
5570 | the attribute is to be used for the insn containing this expression. | |
5571 | @samp{"*"} obviously cannot be used in the @var{default} expression | |
bd819a4a | 5572 | of a @code{define_attr}. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5573 | |
5574 | If the attribute whose value is being specified is numeric, @var{value} | |
5575 | must be a string containing a non-negative integer (normally | |
5576 | @code{const_int} would be used in this case). Otherwise, it must | |
5577 | contain one of the valid values for the attribute. | |
5578 | ||
5579 | @cindex @code{if_then_else} and attributes | |
5580 | @item (if_then_else @var{test} @var{true-value} @var{false-value}) | |
5581 | @var{test} specifies an attribute test, whose format is defined below. | |
5582 | The value of this expression is @var{true-value} if @var{test} is true, | |
5583 | otherwise it is @var{false-value}. | |
5584 | ||
5585 | @cindex @code{cond} and attributes | |
5586 | @item (cond [@var{test1} @var{value1} @dots{}] @var{default}) | |
5587 | The first operand of this expression is a vector containing an even | |
5588 | number of expressions and consisting of pairs of @var{test} and @var{value} | |
5589 | expressions. The value of the @code{cond} expression is that of the | |
5590 | @var{value} corresponding to the first true @var{test} expression. If | |
5591 | none of the @var{test} expressions are true, the value of the @code{cond} | |
5592 | expression is that of the @var{default} expression. | |
5593 | @end table | |
5594 | ||
5595 | @var{test} expressions can have one of the following forms: | |
5596 | ||
5597 | @table @code | |
5598 | @cindex @code{const_int} and attribute tests | |
5599 | @item (const_int @var{i}) | |
df2a54e9 | 5600 | This test is true if @var{i} is nonzero and false otherwise. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5601 | |
5602 | @cindex @code{not} and attributes | |
5603 | @cindex @code{ior} and attributes | |
5604 | @cindex @code{and} and attributes | |
5605 | @item (not @var{test}) | |
5606 | @itemx (ior @var{test1} @var{test2}) | |
5607 | @itemx (and @var{test1} @var{test2}) | |
5608 | These tests are true if the indicated logical function is true. | |
5609 | ||
5610 | @cindex @code{match_operand} and attributes | |
5611 | @item (match_operand:@var{m} @var{n} @var{pred} @var{constraints}) | |
5612 | This test is true if operand @var{n} of the insn whose attribute value | |
5613 | is being determined has mode @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored | |
5614 | if @var{m} is @code{VOIDmode}) and the function specified by the string | |
df2a54e9 | 5615 | @var{pred} returns a nonzero value when passed operand @var{n} and mode |
03dda8e3 RK |
5616 | @var{m} (this part of the test is ignored if @var{pred} is the null |
5617 | string). | |
5618 | ||
5619 | The @var{constraints} operand is ignored and should be the null string. | |
5620 | ||
5621 | @cindex @code{le} and attributes | |
5622 | @cindex @code{leu} and attributes | |
5623 | @cindex @code{lt} and attributes | |
5624 | @cindex @code{gt} and attributes | |
5625 | @cindex @code{gtu} and attributes | |
5626 | @cindex @code{ge} and attributes | |
5627 | @cindex @code{geu} and attributes | |
5628 | @cindex @code{ne} and attributes | |
5629 | @cindex @code{eq} and attributes | |
5630 | @cindex @code{plus} and attributes | |
5631 | @cindex @code{minus} and attributes | |
5632 | @cindex @code{mult} and attributes | |
5633 | @cindex @code{div} and attributes | |
5634 | @cindex @code{mod} and attributes | |
5635 | @cindex @code{abs} and attributes | |
5636 | @cindex @code{neg} and attributes | |
5637 | @cindex @code{ashift} and attributes | |
5638 | @cindex @code{lshiftrt} and attributes | |
5639 | @cindex @code{ashiftrt} and attributes | |
5640 | @item (le @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5641 | @itemx (leu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5642 | @itemx (lt @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5643 | @itemx (ltu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5644 | @itemx (gt @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5645 | @itemx (gtu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5646 | @itemx (ge @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5647 | @itemx (geu @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5648 | @itemx (ne @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5649 | @itemx (eq @var{arith1} @var{arith2}) | |
5650 | These tests are true if the indicated comparison of the two arithmetic | |
5651 | expressions is true. Arithmetic expressions are formed with | |
5652 | @code{plus}, @code{minus}, @code{mult}, @code{div}, @code{mod}, | |
5653 | @code{abs}, @code{neg}, @code{and}, @code{ior}, @code{xor}, @code{not}, | |
bd819a4a | 5654 | @code{ashift}, @code{lshiftrt}, and @code{ashiftrt} expressions. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5655 | |
5656 | @findex get_attr | |
5657 | @code{const_int} and @code{symbol_ref} are always valid terms (@pxref{Insn | |
5658 | Lengths},for additional forms). @code{symbol_ref} is a string | |
5659 | denoting a C expression that yields an @code{int} when evaluated by the | |
5660 | @samp{get_attr_@dots{}} routine. It should normally be a global | |
bd819a4a | 5661 | variable. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5662 | |
5663 | @findex eq_attr | |
5664 | @item (eq_attr @var{name} @var{value}) | |
5665 | @var{name} is a string specifying the name of an attribute. | |
5666 | ||
5667 | @var{value} is a string that is either a valid value for attribute | |
5668 | @var{name}, a comma-separated list of values, or @samp{!} followed by a | |
5669 | value or list. If @var{value} does not begin with a @samp{!}, this | |
5670 | test is true if the value of the @var{name} attribute of the current | |
5671 | insn is in the list specified by @var{value}. If @var{value} begins | |
5672 | with a @samp{!}, this test is true if the attribute's value is | |
5673 | @emph{not} in the specified list. | |
5674 | ||
5675 | For example, | |
5676 | ||
5677 | @smallexample | |
5678 | (eq_attr "type" "load,store") | |
5679 | @end smallexample | |
5680 | ||
5681 | @noindent | |
5682 | is equivalent to | |
5683 | ||
5684 | @smallexample | |
5685 | (ior (eq_attr "type" "load") (eq_attr "type" "store")) | |
5686 | @end smallexample | |
5687 | ||
5688 | If @var{name} specifies an attribute of @samp{alternative}, it refers to the | |
5689 | value of the compiler variable @code{which_alternative} | |
5690 | (@pxref{Output Statement}) and the values must be small integers. For | |
bd819a4a | 5691 | example, |
03dda8e3 RK |
5692 | |
5693 | @smallexample | |
5694 | (eq_attr "alternative" "2,3") | |
5695 | @end smallexample | |
5696 | ||
5697 | @noindent | |
5698 | is equivalent to | |
5699 | ||
5700 | @smallexample | |
5701 | (ior (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 2)) | |
5702 | (eq (symbol_ref "which_alternative") (const_int 3))) | |
5703 | @end smallexample | |
5704 | ||
5705 | Note that, for most attributes, an @code{eq_attr} test is simplified in cases | |
5706 | where the value of the attribute being tested is known for all insns matching | |
bd819a4a | 5707 | a particular pattern. This is by far the most common case. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5708 | |
5709 | @findex attr_flag | |
5710 | @item (attr_flag @var{name}) | |
5711 | The value of an @code{attr_flag} expression is true if the flag | |
5712 | specified by @var{name} is true for the @code{insn} currently being | |
5713 | scheduled. | |
5714 | ||
5715 | @var{name} is a string specifying one of a fixed set of flags to test. | |
5716 | Test the flags @code{forward} and @code{backward} to determine the | |
5717 | direction of a conditional branch. Test the flags @code{very_likely}, | |
5718 | @code{likely}, @code{very_unlikely}, and @code{unlikely} to determine | |
5719 | if a conditional branch is expected to be taken. | |
5720 | ||
5721 | If the @code{very_likely} flag is true, then the @code{likely} flag is also | |
5722 | true. Likewise for the @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags. | |
5723 | ||
5724 | This example describes a conditional branch delay slot which | |
5725 | can be nullified for forward branches that are taken (annul-true) or | |
5726 | for backward branches which are not taken (annul-false). | |
5727 | ||
5728 | @smallexample | |
5729 | (define_delay (eq_attr "type" "cbranch") | |
5730 | [(eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true") | |
5731 | (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true") | |
5732 | (attr_flag "forward")) | |
5733 | (and (eq_attr "in_branch_delay" "true") | |
5734 | (attr_flag "backward"))]) | |
5735 | @end smallexample | |
5736 | ||
5737 | The @code{forward} and @code{backward} flags are false if the current | |
5738 | @code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch. | |
5739 | ||
5740 | The @code{very_likely} and @code{likely} flags are true if the | |
5741 | @code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch. | |
5742 | The @code{very_unlikely} and @code{unlikely} flags are false if the | |
5743 | @code{insn} being scheduled is not a conditional branch. | |
5744 | ||
5745 | @code{attr_flag} is only used during delay slot scheduling and has no | |
5746 | meaning to other passes of the compiler. | |
00bc45c1 RH |
5747 | |
5748 | @findex attr | |
5749 | @item (attr @var{name}) | |
5750 | The value of another attribute is returned. This is most useful | |
5751 | for numeric attributes, as @code{eq_attr} and @code{attr_flag} | |
5752 | produce more efficient code for non-numeric attributes. | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5753 | @end table |
5754 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5755 | @end ifset |
5756 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5757 | @node Tagging Insns |
5758 | @subsection Assigning Attribute Values to Insns | |
5759 | @cindex tagging insns | |
5760 | @cindex assigning attribute values to insns | |
5761 | ||
5762 | The value assigned to an attribute of an insn is primarily determined by | |
5763 | which pattern is matched by that insn (or which @code{define_peephole} | |
5764 | generated it). Every @code{define_insn} and @code{define_peephole} can | |
5765 | have an optional last argument to specify the values of attributes for | |
5766 | matching insns. The value of any attribute not specified in a particular | |
5767 | insn is set to the default value for that attribute, as specified in its | |
5768 | @code{define_attr}. Extensive use of default values for attributes | |
5769 | permits the specification of the values for only one or two attributes | |
5770 | in the definition of most insn patterns, as seen in the example in the | |
bd819a4a | 5771 | next section. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5772 | |
5773 | The optional last argument of @code{define_insn} and | |
5774 | @code{define_peephole} is a vector of expressions, each of which defines | |
5775 | the value for a single attribute. The most general way of assigning an | |
5776 | attribute's value is to use a @code{set} expression whose first operand is an | |
5777 | @code{attr} expression giving the name of the attribute being set. The | |
5778 | second operand of the @code{set} is an attribute expression | |
bd819a4a | 5779 | (@pxref{Expressions}) giving the value of the attribute. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5780 | |
5781 | When the attribute value depends on the @samp{alternative} attribute | |
5782 | (i.e., which is the applicable alternative in the constraint of the | |
5783 | insn), the @code{set_attr_alternative} expression can be used. It | |
5784 | allows the specification of a vector of attribute expressions, one for | |
5785 | each alternative. | |
5786 | ||
5787 | @findex set_attr | |
5788 | When the generality of arbitrary attribute expressions is not required, | |
5789 | the simpler @code{set_attr} expression can be used, which allows | |
5790 | specifying a string giving either a single attribute value or a list | |
5791 | of attribute values, one for each alternative. | |
5792 | ||
5793 | The form of each of the above specifications is shown below. In each case, | |
5794 | @var{name} is a string specifying the attribute to be set. | |
5795 | ||
5796 | @table @code | |
5797 | @item (set_attr @var{name} @var{value-string}) | |
5798 | @var{value-string} is either a string giving the desired attribute value, | |
5799 | or a string containing a comma-separated list giving the values for | |
5800 | succeeding alternatives. The number of elements must match the number | |
5801 | of alternatives in the constraint of the insn pattern. | |
5802 | ||
5803 | Note that it may be useful to specify @samp{*} for some alternative, in | |
5804 | which case the attribute will assume its default value for insns matching | |
5805 | that alternative. | |
5806 | ||
5807 | @findex set_attr_alternative | |
5808 | @item (set_attr_alternative @var{name} [@var{value1} @var{value2} @dots{}]) | |
5809 | Depending on the alternative of the insn, the value will be one of the | |
5810 | specified values. This is a shorthand for using a @code{cond} with | |
5811 | tests on the @samp{alternative} attribute. | |
5812 | ||
5813 | @findex attr | |
5814 | @item (set (attr @var{name}) @var{value}) | |
5815 | The first operand of this @code{set} must be the special RTL expression | |
5816 | @code{attr}, whose sole operand is a string giving the name of the | |
5817 | attribute being set. @var{value} is the value of the attribute. | |
5818 | @end table | |
5819 | ||
5820 | The following shows three different ways of representing the same | |
5821 | attribute value specification: | |
5822 | ||
5823 | @smallexample | |
5824 | (set_attr "type" "load,store,arith") | |
5825 | ||
5826 | (set_attr_alternative "type" | |
5827 | [(const_string "load") (const_string "store") | |
5828 | (const_string "arith")]) | |
5829 | ||
5830 | (set (attr "type") | |
5831 | (cond [(eq_attr "alternative" "1") (const_string "load") | |
5832 | (eq_attr "alternative" "2") (const_string "store")] | |
5833 | (const_string "arith"))) | |
5834 | @end smallexample | |
5835 | ||
5836 | @need 1000 | |
5837 | @findex define_asm_attributes | |
5838 | The @code{define_asm_attributes} expression provides a mechanism to | |
5839 | specify the attributes assigned to insns produced from an @code{asm} | |
5840 | statement. It has the form: | |
5841 | ||
5842 | @smallexample | |
5843 | (define_asm_attributes [@var{attr-sets}]) | |
5844 | @end smallexample | |
5845 | ||
5846 | @noindent | |
5847 | where @var{attr-sets} is specified the same as for both the | |
5848 | @code{define_insn} and the @code{define_peephole} expressions. | |
5849 | ||
5850 | These values will typically be the ``worst case'' attribute values. For | |
5851 | example, they might indicate that the condition code will be clobbered. | |
5852 | ||
5853 | A specification for a @code{length} attribute is handled specially. The | |
5854 | way to compute the length of an @code{asm} insn is to multiply the | |
5855 | length specified in the expression @code{define_asm_attributes} by the | |
5856 | number of machine instructions specified in the @code{asm} statement, | |
5857 | determined by counting the number of semicolons and newlines in the | |
5858 | string. Therefore, the value of the @code{length} attribute specified | |
5859 | in a @code{define_asm_attributes} should be the maximum possible length | |
5860 | of a single machine instruction. | |
5861 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5862 | @end ifset |
5863 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5864 | @node Attr Example |
5865 | @subsection Example of Attribute Specifications | |
5866 | @cindex attribute specifications example | |
5867 | @cindex attribute specifications | |
5868 | ||
5869 | The judicious use of defaulting is important in the efficient use of | |
5870 | insn attributes. Typically, insns are divided into @dfn{types} and an | |
5871 | attribute, customarily called @code{type}, is used to represent this | |
5872 | value. This attribute is normally used only to define the default value | |
5873 | for other attributes. An example will clarify this usage. | |
5874 | ||
5875 | Assume we have a RISC machine with a condition code and in which only | |
5876 | full-word operations are performed in registers. Let us assume that we | |
5877 | can divide all insns into loads, stores, (integer) arithmetic | |
5878 | operations, floating point operations, and branches. | |
5879 | ||
5880 | Here we will concern ourselves with determining the effect of an insn on | |
5881 | the condition code and will limit ourselves to the following possible | |
5882 | effects: The condition code can be set unpredictably (clobbered), not | |
5883 | be changed, be set to agree with the results of the operation, or only | |
5884 | changed if the item previously set into the condition code has been | |
5885 | modified. | |
5886 | ||
5887 | Here is part of a sample @file{md} file for such a machine: | |
5888 | ||
5889 | @smallexample | |
5890 | (define_attr "type" "load,store,arith,fp,branch" (const_string "arith")) | |
5891 | ||
5892 | (define_attr "cc" "clobber,unchanged,set,change0" | |
5893 | (cond [(eq_attr "type" "load") | |
5894 | (const_string "change0") | |
5895 | (eq_attr "type" "store,branch") | |
5896 | (const_string "unchanged") | |
5897 | (eq_attr "type" "arith") | |
5898 | (if_then_else (match_operand:SI 0 "" "") | |
5899 | (const_string "set") | |
5900 | (const_string "clobber"))] | |
5901 | (const_string "clobber"))) | |
5902 | ||
5903 | (define_insn "" | |
5904 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "general_operand" "=r,r,m") | |
5905 | (match_operand:SI 1 "general_operand" "r,m,r"))] | |
5906 | "" | |
5907 | "@@ | |
5908 | move %0,%1 | |
5909 | load %0,%1 | |
5910 | store %0,%1" | |
5911 | [(set_attr "type" "arith,load,store")]) | |
5912 | @end smallexample | |
5913 | ||
5914 | Note that we assume in the above example that arithmetic operations | |
5915 | performed on quantities smaller than a machine word clobber the condition | |
5916 | code since they will set the condition code to a value corresponding to the | |
5917 | full-word result. | |
5918 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
5919 | @end ifset |
5920 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5921 | @node Insn Lengths |
5922 | @subsection Computing the Length of an Insn | |
5923 | @cindex insn lengths, computing | |
5924 | @cindex computing the length of an insn | |
5925 | ||
5926 | For many machines, multiple types of branch instructions are provided, each | |
5927 | for different length branch displacements. In most cases, the assembler | |
5928 | will choose the correct instruction to use. However, when the assembler | |
b49900cc | 5929 | cannot do so, GCC can when a special attribute, the @code{length} |
03dda8e3 RK |
5930 | attribute, is defined. This attribute must be defined to have numeric |
5931 | values by specifying a null string in its @code{define_attr}. | |
5932 | ||
b49900cc | 5933 | In the case of the @code{length} attribute, two additional forms of |
03dda8e3 RK |
5934 | arithmetic terms are allowed in test expressions: |
5935 | ||
5936 | @table @code | |
5937 | @cindex @code{match_dup} and attributes | |
5938 | @item (match_dup @var{n}) | |
5939 | This refers to the address of operand @var{n} of the current insn, which | |
5940 | must be a @code{label_ref}. | |
5941 | ||
5942 | @cindex @code{pc} and attributes | |
5943 | @item (pc) | |
5944 | This refers to the address of the @emph{current} insn. It might have | |
5945 | been more consistent with other usage to make this the address of the | |
5946 | @emph{next} insn but this would be confusing because the length of the | |
5947 | current insn is to be computed. | |
5948 | @end table | |
5949 | ||
5950 | @cindex @code{addr_vec}, length of | |
5951 | @cindex @code{addr_diff_vec}, length of | |
5952 | For normal insns, the length will be determined by value of the | |
b49900cc | 5953 | @code{length} attribute. In the case of @code{addr_vec} and |
03dda8e3 RK |
5954 | @code{addr_diff_vec} insn patterns, the length is computed as |
5955 | the number of vectors multiplied by the size of each vector. | |
5956 | ||
5957 | Lengths are measured in addressable storage units (bytes). | |
5958 | ||
5959 | The following macros can be used to refine the length computation: | |
5960 | ||
5961 | @table @code | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5962 | @findex ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH |
5963 | @item ADJUST_INSN_LENGTH (@var{insn}, @var{length}) | |
5964 | If defined, modifies the length assigned to instruction @var{insn} as a | |
5965 | function of the context in which it is used. @var{length} is an lvalue | |
5966 | that contains the initially computed length of the insn and should be | |
a8aa4e0b | 5967 | updated with the correct length of the insn. |
03dda8e3 RK |
5968 | |
5969 | This macro will normally not be required. A case in which it is | |
161d7b59 | 5970 | required is the ROMP@. On this machine, the size of an @code{addr_vec} |
03dda8e3 RK |
5971 | insn must be increased by two to compensate for the fact that alignment |
5972 | may be required. | |
5973 | @end table | |
5974 | ||
5975 | @findex get_attr_length | |
5976 | The routine that returns @code{get_attr_length} (the value of the | |
5977 | @code{length} attribute) can be used by the output routine to | |
5978 | determine the form of the branch instruction to be written, as the | |
5979 | example below illustrates. | |
5980 | ||
5981 | As an example of the specification of variable-length branches, consider | |
5982 | the IBM 360. If we adopt the convention that a register will be set to | |
5983 | the starting address of a function, we can jump to labels within 4k of | |
5984 | the start using a four-byte instruction. Otherwise, we need a six-byte | |
5985 | sequence to load the address from memory and then branch to it. | |
5986 | ||
5987 | On such a machine, a pattern for a branch instruction might be specified | |
5988 | as follows: | |
5989 | ||
5990 | @smallexample | |
5991 | (define_insn "jump" | |
5992 | [(set (pc) | |
5993 | (label_ref (match_operand 0 "" "")))] | |
5994 | "" | |
03dda8e3 RK |
5995 | @{ |
5996 | return (get_attr_length (insn) == 4 | |
0f40f9f7 ZW |
5997 | ? "b %l0" : "l r15,=a(%l0); br r15"); |
5998 | @} | |
9c34dbbf ZW |
5999 | [(set (attr "length") |
6000 | (if_then_else (lt (match_dup 0) (const_int 4096)) | |
6001 | (const_int 4) | |
6002 | (const_int 6)))]) | |
03dda8e3 RK |
6003 | @end smallexample |
6004 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
6005 | @end ifset |
6006 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
6007 | @node Constant Attributes |
6008 | @subsection Constant Attributes | |
6009 | @cindex constant attributes | |
6010 | ||
6011 | A special form of @code{define_attr}, where the expression for the | |
6012 | default value is a @code{const} expression, indicates an attribute that | |
6013 | is constant for a given run of the compiler. Constant attributes may be | |
6014 | used to specify which variety of processor is used. For example, | |
6015 | ||
6016 | @smallexample | |
6017 | (define_attr "cpu" "m88100,m88110,m88000" | |
6018 | (const | |
6019 | (cond [(symbol_ref "TARGET_88100") (const_string "m88100") | |
6020 | (symbol_ref "TARGET_88110") (const_string "m88110")] | |
6021 | (const_string "m88000")))) | |
6022 | ||
6023 | (define_attr "memory" "fast,slow" | |
6024 | (const | |
6025 | (if_then_else (symbol_ref "TARGET_FAST_MEM") | |
6026 | (const_string "fast") | |
6027 | (const_string "slow")))) | |
6028 | @end smallexample | |
6029 | ||
6030 | The routine generated for constant attributes has no parameters as it | |
6031 | does not depend on any particular insn. RTL expressions used to define | |
6032 | the value of a constant attribute may use the @code{symbol_ref} form, | |
6033 | but may not use either the @code{match_operand} form or @code{eq_attr} | |
6034 | forms involving insn attributes. | |
6035 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
6036 | @end ifset |
6037 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
03dda8e3 RK |
6038 | @node Delay Slots |
6039 | @subsection Delay Slot Scheduling | |
6040 | @cindex delay slots, defining | |
6041 | ||
6042 | The insn attribute mechanism can be used to specify the requirements for | |
6043 | delay slots, if any, on a target machine. An instruction is said to | |
6044 | require a @dfn{delay slot} if some instructions that are physically | |
6045 | after the instruction are executed as if they were located before it. | |
6046 | Classic examples are branch and call instructions, which often execute | |
6047 | the following instruction before the branch or call is performed. | |
6048 | ||
6049 | On some machines, conditional branch instructions can optionally | |
6050 | @dfn{annul} instructions in the delay slot. This means that the | |
6051 | instruction will not be executed for certain branch outcomes. Both | |
6052 | instructions that annul if the branch is true and instructions that | |
6053 | annul if the branch is false are supported. | |
6054 | ||
6055 | Delay slot scheduling differs from instruction scheduling in that | |
6056 | determining whether an instruction needs a delay slot is dependent only | |
6057 | on the type of instruction being generated, not on data flow between the | |
6058 | instructions. See the next section for a discussion of data-dependent | |
6059 | instruction scheduling. | |
6060 | ||
6061 | @findex define_delay | |
6062 | The requirement of an insn needing one or more delay slots is indicated | |
6063 | via the @code{define_delay} expression. It has the following form: | |
6064 | ||
6065 | @smallexample | |
6066 | (define_delay @var{test} | |
6067 | [@var{delay-1} @var{annul-true-1} @var{annul-false-1} | |
6068 | @var{delay-2} @var{annul-true-2} @var{annul-false-2} | |
6069 | @dots{}]) | |
6070 | @end smallexample | |
6071 | ||
6072 | @var{test} is an attribute test that indicates whether this | |
6073 | @code{define_delay} applies to a particular insn. If so, the number of | |
6074 | required delay slots is determined by the length of the vector specified | |
6075 | as the second argument. An insn placed in delay slot @var{n} must | |
6076 | satisfy attribute test @var{delay-n}. @var{annul-true-n} is an | |
6077 | attribute test that specifies which insns may be annulled if the branch | |
6078 | is true. Similarly, @var{annul-false-n} specifies which insns in the | |
6079 | delay slot may be annulled if the branch is false. If annulling is not | |
bd819a4a | 6080 | supported for that delay slot, @code{(nil)} should be coded. |
03dda8e3 RK |
6081 | |
6082 | For example, in the common case where branch and call insns require | |
6083 | a single delay slot, which may contain any insn other than a branch or | |
6084 | call, the following would be placed in the @file{md} file: | |
6085 | ||
6086 | @smallexample | |
6087 | (define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch,call") | |
6088 | [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)]) | |
6089 | @end smallexample | |
6090 | ||
6091 | Multiple @code{define_delay} expressions may be specified. In this | |
6092 | case, each such expression specifies different delay slot requirements | |
6093 | and there must be no insn for which tests in two @code{define_delay} | |
6094 | expressions are both true. | |
6095 | ||
6096 | For example, if we have a machine that requires one delay slot for branches | |
6097 | but two for calls, no delay slot can contain a branch or call insn, | |
6098 | and any valid insn in the delay slot for the branch can be annulled if the | |
6099 | branch is true, we might represent this as follows: | |
6100 | ||
6101 | @smallexample | |
6102 | (define_delay (eq_attr "type" "branch") | |
6103 | [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") | |
6104 | (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") | |
6105 | (nil)]) | |
6106 | ||
6107 | (define_delay (eq_attr "type" "call") | |
6108 | [(eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil) | |
6109 | (eq_attr "type" "!branch,call") (nil) (nil)]) | |
6110 | @end smallexample | |
6111 | @c the above is *still* too long. --mew 4feb93 | |
6112 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
6113 | @end ifset |
6114 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
fae15c93 VM |
6115 | @node Processor pipeline description |
6116 | @subsection Specifying processor pipeline description | |
6117 | @cindex processor pipeline description | |
6118 | @cindex processor functional units | |
6119 | @cindex instruction latency time | |
6120 | @cindex interlock delays | |
6121 | @cindex data dependence delays | |
6122 | @cindex reservation delays | |
6123 | @cindex pipeline hazard recognizer | |
6124 | @cindex automaton based pipeline description | |
6125 | @cindex regular expressions | |
6126 | @cindex deterministic finite state automaton | |
6127 | @cindex automaton based scheduler | |
6128 | @cindex RISC | |
6129 | @cindex VLIW | |
6130 | ||
ef261fee | 6131 | To achieve better performance, most modern processors |
fae15c93 VM |
6132 | (super-pipelined, superscalar @acronym{RISC}, and @acronym{VLIW} |
6133 | processors) have many @dfn{functional units} on which several | |
6134 | instructions can be executed simultaneously. An instruction starts | |
6135 | execution if its issue conditions are satisfied. If not, the | |
ef261fee | 6136 | instruction is stalled until its conditions are satisfied. Such |
fae15c93 | 6137 | @dfn{interlock (pipeline) delay} causes interruption of the fetching |
431ae0bf | 6138 | of successor instructions (or demands nop instructions, e.g.@: for some |
fae15c93 VM |
6139 | MIPS processors). |
6140 | ||
6141 | There are two major kinds of interlock delays in modern processors. | |
6142 | The first one is a data dependence delay determining @dfn{instruction | |
6143 | latency time}. The instruction execution is not started until all | |
6144 | source data have been evaluated by prior instructions (there are more | |
6145 | complex cases when the instruction execution starts even when the data | |
c0478a66 | 6146 | are not available but will be ready in given time after the |
fae15c93 VM |
6147 | instruction execution start). Taking the data dependence delays into |
6148 | account is simple. The data dependence (true, output, and | |
6149 | anti-dependence) delay between two instructions is given by a | |
6150 | constant. In most cases this approach is adequate. The second kind | |
6151 | of interlock delays is a reservation delay. The reservation delay | |
6152 | means that two instructions under execution will be in need of shared | |
431ae0bf | 6153 | processors resources, i.e.@: buses, internal registers, and/or |
fae15c93 VM |
6154 | functional units, which are reserved for some time. Taking this kind |
6155 | of delay into account is complex especially for modern @acronym{RISC} | |
6156 | processors. | |
6157 | ||
6158 | The task of exploiting more processor parallelism is solved by an | |
ef261fee | 6159 | instruction scheduler. For a better solution to this problem, the |
fae15c93 | 6160 | instruction scheduler has to have an adequate description of the |
fa0aee89 PB |
6161 | processor parallelism (or @dfn{pipeline description}). GCC |
6162 | machine descriptions describe processor parallelism and functional | |
6163 | unit reservations for groups of instructions with the aid of | |
6164 | @dfn{regular expressions}. | |
ef261fee R |
6165 | |
6166 | The GCC instruction scheduler uses a @dfn{pipeline hazard recognizer} to | |
fae15c93 | 6167 | figure out the possibility of the instruction issue by the processor |
ef261fee R |
6168 | on a given simulated processor cycle. The pipeline hazard recognizer is |
6169 | automatically generated from the processor pipeline description. The | |
fa0aee89 PB |
6170 | pipeline hazard recognizer generated from the machine description |
6171 | is based on a deterministic finite state automaton (@acronym{DFA}): | |
6172 | the instruction issue is possible if there is a transition from one | |
6173 | automaton state to another one. This algorithm is very fast, and | |
6174 | furthermore, its speed is not dependent on processor | |
6175 | complexity@footnote{However, the size of the automaton depends on | |
6176 | processor complexity. To limit this effect, machine descriptions | |
6177 | can split orthogonal parts of the machine description among several | |
6178 | automata: but then, since each of these must be stepped independently, | |
6179 | this does cause a small decrease in the algorithm's performance.}. | |
fae15c93 | 6180 | |
fae15c93 | 6181 | @cindex automaton based pipeline description |
fa0aee89 PB |
6182 | The rest of this section describes the directives that constitute |
6183 | an automaton-based processor pipeline description. The order of | |
6184 | these constructions within the machine description file is not | |
6185 | important. | |
fae15c93 VM |
6186 | |
6187 | @findex define_automaton | |
6188 | @cindex pipeline hazard recognizer | |
6189 | The following optional construction describes names of automata | |
6190 | generated and used for the pipeline hazards recognition. Sometimes | |
6191 | the generated finite state automaton used by the pipeline hazard | |
ef261fee | 6192 | recognizer is large. If we use more than one automaton and bind functional |
daf2f129 | 6193 | units to the automata, the total size of the automata is usually |
fae15c93 VM |
6194 | less than the size of the single automaton. If there is no one such |
6195 | construction, only one finite state automaton is generated. | |
6196 | ||
6197 | @smallexample | |
6198 | (define_automaton @var{automata-names}) | |
6199 | @end smallexample | |
6200 | ||
6201 | @var{automata-names} is a string giving names of the automata. The | |
6202 | names are separated by commas. All the automata should have unique names. | |
c62347f0 | 6203 | The automaton name is used in the constructions @code{define_cpu_unit} and |
fae15c93 VM |
6204 | @code{define_query_cpu_unit}. |
6205 | ||
6206 | @findex define_cpu_unit | |
6207 | @cindex processor functional units | |
c62347f0 | 6208 | Each processor functional unit used in the description of instruction |
fae15c93 VM |
6209 | reservations should be described by the following construction. |
6210 | ||
6211 | @smallexample | |
6212 | (define_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}]) | |
6213 | @end smallexample | |
6214 | ||
6215 | @var{unit-names} is a string giving the names of the functional units | |
6216 | separated by commas. Don't use name @samp{nothing}, it is reserved | |
6217 | for other goals. | |
6218 | ||
ef261fee | 6219 | @var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with |
fae15c93 VM |
6220 | which the unit is bound. The automaton should be described in |
6221 | construction @code{define_automaton}. You should give | |
6222 | @dfn{automaton-name}, if there is a defined automaton. | |
6223 | ||
30028c85 VM |
6224 | The assignment of units to automata are constrained by the uses of the |
6225 | units in insn reservations. The most important constraint is: if a | |
6226 | unit reservation is present on a particular cycle of an alternative | |
6227 | for an insn reservation, then some unit from the same automaton must | |
6228 | be present on the same cycle for the other alternatives of the insn | |
6229 | reservation. The rest of the constraints are mentioned in the | |
6230 | description of the subsequent constructions. | |
6231 | ||
fae15c93 VM |
6232 | @findex define_query_cpu_unit |
6233 | @cindex querying function unit reservations | |
6234 | The following construction describes CPU functional units analogously | |
30028c85 VM |
6235 | to @code{define_cpu_unit}. The reservation of such units can be |
6236 | queried for an automaton state. The instruction scheduler never | |
6237 | queries reservation of functional units for given automaton state. So | |
6238 | as a rule, you don't need this construction. This construction could | |
431ae0bf | 6239 | be used for future code generation goals (e.g.@: to generate |
30028c85 | 6240 | @acronym{VLIW} insn templates). |
fae15c93 VM |
6241 | |
6242 | @smallexample | |
6243 | (define_query_cpu_unit @var{unit-names} [@var{automaton-name}]) | |
6244 | @end smallexample | |
6245 | ||
6246 | @var{unit-names} is a string giving names of the functional units | |
6247 | separated by commas. | |
6248 | ||
ef261fee | 6249 | @var{automaton-name} is a string giving the name of the automaton with |
fae15c93 VM |
6250 | which the unit is bound. |
6251 | ||
6252 | @findex define_insn_reservation | |
6253 | @cindex instruction latency time | |
6254 | @cindex regular expressions | |
6255 | @cindex data bypass | |
ef261fee | 6256 | The following construction is the major one to describe pipeline |
fae15c93 VM |
6257 | characteristics of an instruction. |
6258 | ||
6259 | @smallexample | |
6260 | (define_insn_reservation @var{insn-name} @var{default_latency} | |
6261 | @var{condition} @var{regexp}) | |
6262 | @end smallexample | |
6263 | ||
6264 | @var{default_latency} is a number giving latency time of the | |
6265 | instruction. There is an important difference between the old | |
6266 | description and the automaton based pipeline description. The latency | |
6267 | time is used for all dependencies when we use the old description. In | |
ef261fee R |
6268 | the automaton based pipeline description, the given latency time is only |
6269 | used for true dependencies. The cost of anti-dependencies is always | |
fae15c93 VM |
6270 | zero and the cost of output dependencies is the difference between |
6271 | latency times of the producing and consuming insns (if the difference | |
ef261fee R |
6272 | is negative, the cost is considered to be zero). You can always |
6273 | change the default costs for any description by using the target hook | |
fae15c93 VM |
6274 | @code{TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST} (@pxref{Scheduling}). |
6275 | ||
cc6a602b | 6276 | @var{insn-name} is a string giving the internal name of the insn. The |
fae15c93 VM |
6277 | internal names are used in constructions @code{define_bypass} and in |
6278 | the automaton description file generated for debugging. The internal | |
ef261fee | 6279 | name has nothing in common with the names in @code{define_insn}. It is a |
fae15c93 VM |
6280 | good practice to use insn classes described in the processor manual. |
6281 | ||
6282 | @var{condition} defines what RTL insns are described by this | |
6283 | construction. You should remember that you will be in trouble if | |
6284 | @var{condition} for two or more different | |
6285 | @code{define_insn_reservation} constructions is TRUE for an insn. In | |
6286 | this case what reservation will be used for the insn is not defined. | |
6287 | Such cases are not checked during generation of the pipeline hazards | |
6288 | recognizer because in general recognizing that two conditions may have | |
6289 | the same value is quite difficult (especially if the conditions | |
6290 | contain @code{symbol_ref}). It is also not checked during the | |
6291 | pipeline hazard recognizer work because it would slow down the | |
6292 | recognizer considerably. | |
6293 | ||
ef261fee | 6294 | @var{regexp} is a string describing the reservation of the cpu's functional |
fae15c93 VM |
6295 | units by the instruction. The reservations are described by a regular |
6296 | expression according to the following syntax: | |
6297 | ||
6298 | @smallexample | |
6299 | regexp = regexp "," oneof | |
6300 | | oneof | |
6301 | ||
6302 | oneof = oneof "|" allof | |
6303 | | allof | |
6304 | ||
6305 | allof = allof "+" repeat | |
6306 | | repeat | |
daf2f129 | 6307 | |
fae15c93 VM |
6308 | repeat = element "*" number |
6309 | | element | |
6310 | ||
6311 | element = cpu_function_unit_name | |
6312 | | reservation_name | |
6313 | | result_name | |
6314 | | "nothing" | |
6315 | | "(" regexp ")" | |
6316 | @end smallexample | |
6317 | ||
6318 | @itemize @bullet | |
6319 | @item | |
6320 | @samp{,} is used for describing the start of the next cycle in | |
6321 | the reservation. | |
6322 | ||
6323 | @item | |
6324 | @samp{|} is used for describing a reservation described by the first | |
6325 | regular expression @strong{or} a reservation described by the second | |
6326 | regular expression @strong{or} etc. | |
6327 | ||
6328 | @item | |
6329 | @samp{+} is used for describing a reservation described by the first | |
6330 | regular expression @strong{and} a reservation described by the | |
6331 | second regular expression @strong{and} etc. | |
6332 | ||
6333 | @item | |
6334 | @samp{*} is used for convenience and simply means a sequence in which | |
6335 | the regular expression are repeated @var{number} times with cycle | |
6336 | advancing (see @samp{,}). | |
6337 | ||
6338 | @item | |
6339 | @samp{cpu_function_unit_name} denotes reservation of the named | |
6340 | functional unit. | |
6341 | ||
6342 | @item | |
6343 | @samp{reservation_name} --- see description of construction | |
6344 | @samp{define_reservation}. | |
6345 | ||
6346 | @item | |
6347 | @samp{nothing} denotes no unit reservations. | |
6348 | @end itemize | |
6349 | ||
6350 | @findex define_reservation | |
6351 | Sometimes unit reservations for different insns contain common parts. | |
6352 | In such case, you can simplify the pipeline description by describing | |
6353 | the common part by the following construction | |
6354 | ||
6355 | @smallexample | |
6356 | (define_reservation @var{reservation-name} @var{regexp}) | |
6357 | @end smallexample | |
6358 | ||
6359 | @var{reservation-name} is a string giving name of @var{regexp}. | |
6360 | Functional unit names and reservation names are in the same name | |
6361 | space. So the reservation names should be different from the | |
cc6a602b | 6362 | functional unit names and can not be the reserved name @samp{nothing}. |
fae15c93 VM |
6363 | |
6364 | @findex define_bypass | |
6365 | @cindex instruction latency time | |
6366 | @cindex data bypass | |
6367 | The following construction is used to describe exceptions in the | |
6368 | latency time for given instruction pair. This is so called bypasses. | |
6369 | ||
6370 | @smallexample | |
6371 | (define_bypass @var{number} @var{out_insn_names} @var{in_insn_names} | |
6372 | [@var{guard}]) | |
6373 | @end smallexample | |
6374 | ||
6375 | @var{number} defines when the result generated by the instructions | |
6376 | given in string @var{out_insn_names} will be ready for the | |
6377 | instructions given in string @var{in_insn_names}. The instructions in | |
6378 | the string are separated by commas. | |
6379 | ||
ef261fee | 6380 | @var{guard} is an optional string giving the name of a C function which |
fae15c93 VM |
6381 | defines an additional guard for the bypass. The function will get the |
6382 | two insns as parameters. If the function returns zero the bypass will | |
6383 | be ignored for this case. The additional guard is necessary to | |
431ae0bf | 6384 | recognize complicated bypasses, e.g.@: when the consumer is only an address |
fae15c93 VM |
6385 | of insn @samp{store} (not a stored value). |
6386 | ||
6387 | @findex exclusion_set | |
6388 | @findex presence_set | |
30028c85 | 6389 | @findex final_presence_set |
fae15c93 | 6390 | @findex absence_set |
30028c85 | 6391 | @findex final_absence_set |
fae15c93 VM |
6392 | @cindex VLIW |
6393 | @cindex RISC | |
cc6a602b BE |
6394 | The following five constructions are usually used to describe |
6395 | @acronym{VLIW} processors, or more precisely, to describe a placement | |
6396 | of small instructions into @acronym{VLIW} instruction slots. They | |
6397 | can be used for @acronym{RISC} processors, too. | |
fae15c93 VM |
6398 | |
6399 | @smallexample | |
6400 | (exclusion_set @var{unit-names} @var{unit-names}) | |
30028c85 VM |
6401 | (presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) |
6402 | (final_presence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) | |
6403 | (absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) | |
6404 | (final_absence_set @var{unit-names} @var{patterns}) | |
fae15c93 VM |
6405 | @end smallexample |
6406 | ||
6407 | @var{unit-names} is a string giving names of functional units | |
6408 | separated by commas. | |
6409 | ||
30028c85 | 6410 | @var{patterns} is a string giving patterns of functional units |
0bdcd332 | 6411 | separated by comma. Currently pattern is one unit or units |
30028c85 VM |
6412 | separated by white-spaces. |
6413 | ||
fae15c93 VM |
6414 | The first construction (@samp{exclusion_set}) means that each |
6415 | functional unit in the first string can not be reserved simultaneously | |
6416 | with a unit whose name is in the second string and vice versa. For | |
6417 | example, the construction is useful for describing processors | |
431ae0bf | 6418 | (e.g.@: some SPARC processors) with a fully pipelined floating point |
fae15c93 VM |
6419 | functional unit which can execute simultaneously only single floating |
6420 | point insns or only double floating point insns. | |
6421 | ||
6422 | The second construction (@samp{presence_set}) means that each | |
6423 | functional unit in the first string can not be reserved unless at | |
30028c85 VM |
6424 | least one of pattern of units whose names are in the second string is |
6425 | reserved. This is an asymmetric relation. For example, it is useful | |
6426 | for description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot1} is reserved after | |
6427 | @samp{slot0} reservation. We could describe it by the following | |
6428 | construction | |
6429 | ||
6430 | @smallexample | |
6431 | (presence_set "slot1" "slot0") | |
6432 | @end smallexample | |
6433 | ||
6434 | Or @samp{slot1} is reserved only after @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0} | |
6435 | reservation. In this case we could write | |
6436 | ||
6437 | @smallexample | |
6438 | (presence_set "slot1" "slot0 b0") | |
6439 | @end smallexample | |
6440 | ||
6441 | The third construction (@samp{final_presence_set}) is analogous to | |
6442 | @samp{presence_set}. The difference between them is when checking is | |
6443 | done. When an instruction is issued in given automaton state | |
6444 | reflecting all current and planned unit reservations, the automaton | |
6445 | state is changed. The first state is a source state, the second one | |
6446 | is a result state. Checking for @samp{presence_set} is done on the | |
6447 | source state reservation, checking for @samp{final_presence_set} is | |
6448 | done on the result reservation. This construction is useful to | |
6449 | describe a reservation which is actually two subsequent reservations. | |
6450 | For example, if we use | |
6451 | ||
6452 | @smallexample | |
6453 | (presence_set "slot1" "slot0") | |
6454 | @end smallexample | |
6455 | ||
6456 | the following insn will be never issued (because @samp{slot1} requires | |
6457 | @samp{slot0} which is absent in the source state). | |
6458 | ||
6459 | @smallexample | |
6460 | (define_reservation "insn_and_nop" "slot0 + slot1") | |
6461 | @end smallexample | |
6462 | ||
6463 | but it can be issued if we use analogous @samp{final_presence_set}. | |
6464 | ||
6465 | The forth construction (@samp{absence_set}) means that each functional | |
6466 | unit in the first string can be reserved only if each pattern of units | |
6467 | whose names are in the second string is not reserved. This is an | |
6468 | asymmetric relation (actually @samp{exclusion_set} is analogous to | |
6469 | this one but it is symmetric). For example, it is useful for | |
6470 | description that @acronym{VLIW} @samp{slot0} can not be reserved after | |
6471 | @samp{slot1} or @samp{slot2} reservation. We could describe it by the | |
6472 | following construction | |
6473 | ||
6474 | @smallexample | |
6475 | (absence_set "slot2" "slot0, slot1") | |
6476 | @end smallexample | |
6477 | ||
6478 | Or @samp{slot2} can not be reserved if @samp{slot0} and unit @samp{b0} | |
6479 | are reserved or @samp{slot1} and unit @samp{b1} are reserved. In | |
6480 | this case we could write | |
6481 | ||
6482 | @smallexample | |
6483 | (absence_set "slot2" "slot0 b0, slot1 b1") | |
6484 | @end smallexample | |
fae15c93 | 6485 | |
ef261fee | 6486 | All functional units mentioned in a set should belong to the same |
fae15c93 VM |
6487 | automaton. |
6488 | ||
30028c85 VM |
6489 | The last construction (@samp{final_absence_set}) is analogous to |
6490 | @samp{absence_set} but checking is done on the result (state) | |
6491 | reservation. See comments for @samp{final_presence_set}. | |
6492 | ||
fae15c93 VM |
6493 | @findex automata_option |
6494 | @cindex deterministic finite state automaton | |
6495 | @cindex nondeterministic finite state automaton | |
6496 | @cindex finite state automaton minimization | |
6497 | You can control the generator of the pipeline hazard recognizer with | |
6498 | the following construction. | |
6499 | ||
6500 | @smallexample | |
6501 | (automata_option @var{options}) | |
6502 | @end smallexample | |
6503 | ||
6504 | @var{options} is a string giving options which affect the generated | |
6505 | code. Currently there are the following options: | |
6506 | ||
6507 | @itemize @bullet | |
6508 | @item | |
6509 | @dfn{no-minimization} makes no minimization of the automaton. This is | |
30028c85 VM |
6510 | only worth to do when we are debugging the description and need to |
6511 | look more accurately at reservations of states. | |
fae15c93 VM |
6512 | |
6513 | @item | |
e3c8eb86 VM |
6514 | @dfn{time} means printing additional time statistics about |
6515 | generation of automata. | |
6516 | ||
6517 | @item | |
6518 | @dfn{v} means a generation of the file describing the result automata. | |
6519 | The file has suffix @samp{.dfa} and can be used for the description | |
6520 | verification and debugging. | |
6521 | ||
6522 | @item | |
6523 | @dfn{w} means a generation of warning instead of error for | |
6524 | non-critical errors. | |
fae15c93 VM |
6525 | |
6526 | @item | |
6527 | @dfn{ndfa} makes nondeterministic finite state automata. This affects | |
6528 | the treatment of operator @samp{|} in the regular expressions. The | |
6529 | usual treatment of the operator is to try the first alternative and, | |
6530 | if the reservation is not possible, the second alternative. The | |
6531 | nondeterministic treatment means trying all alternatives, some of them | |
96ddf8ef | 6532 | may be rejected by reservations in the subsequent insns. |
dfa849f3 VM |
6533 | |
6534 | @item | |
6535 | @dfn{progress} means output of a progress bar showing how many states | |
6536 | were generated so far for automaton being processed. This is useful | |
6537 | during debugging a @acronym{DFA} description. If you see too many | |
6538 | generated states, you could interrupt the generator of the pipeline | |
6539 | hazard recognizer and try to figure out a reason for generation of the | |
6540 | huge automaton. | |
fae15c93 VM |
6541 | @end itemize |
6542 | ||
6543 | As an example, consider a superscalar @acronym{RISC} machine which can | |
6544 | issue three insns (two integer insns and one floating point insn) on | |
6545 | the cycle but can finish only two insns. To describe this, we define | |
6546 | the following functional units. | |
6547 | ||
6548 | @smallexample | |
6549 | (define_cpu_unit "i0_pipeline, i1_pipeline, f_pipeline") | |
ef261fee | 6550 | (define_cpu_unit "port0, port1") |
fae15c93 VM |
6551 | @end smallexample |
6552 | ||
6553 | All simple integer insns can be executed in any integer pipeline and | |
6554 | their result is ready in two cycles. The simple integer insns are | |
6555 | issued into the first pipeline unless it is reserved, otherwise they | |
6556 | are issued into the second pipeline. Integer division and | |
6557 | multiplication insns can be executed only in the second integer | |
6558 | pipeline and their results are ready correspondingly in 8 and 4 | |
431ae0bf | 6559 | cycles. The integer division is not pipelined, i.e.@: the subsequent |
fae15c93 VM |
6560 | integer division insn can not be issued until the current division |
6561 | insn finished. Floating point insns are fully pipelined and their | |
ef261fee R |
6562 | results are ready in 3 cycles. Where the result of a floating point |
6563 | insn is used by an integer insn, an additional delay of one cycle is | |
6564 | incurred. To describe all of this we could specify | |
fae15c93 VM |
6565 | |
6566 | @smallexample | |
6567 | (define_cpu_unit "div") | |
6568 | ||
68e4d4c5 | 6569 | (define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int") |
ef261fee | 6570 | "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), (port0 | port1)") |
fae15c93 | 6571 | |
68e4d4c5 | 6572 | (define_insn_reservation "mult" 4 (eq_attr "type" "mult") |
ef261fee | 6573 | "i1_pipeline, nothing*2, (port0 | port1)") |
fae15c93 | 6574 | |
68e4d4c5 | 6575 | (define_insn_reservation "div" 8 (eq_attr "type" "div") |
ef261fee | 6576 | "i1_pipeline, div*7, div + (port0 | port1)") |
fae15c93 | 6577 | |
68e4d4c5 | 6578 | (define_insn_reservation "float" 3 (eq_attr "type" "float") |
ef261fee | 6579 | "f_pipeline, nothing, (port0 | port1)) |
fae15c93 | 6580 | |
ef261fee | 6581 | (define_bypass 4 "float" "simple,mult,div") |
fae15c93 VM |
6582 | @end smallexample |
6583 | ||
6584 | To simplify the description we could describe the following reservation | |
6585 | ||
6586 | @smallexample | |
6587 | (define_reservation "finish" "port0|port1") | |
6588 | @end smallexample | |
6589 | ||
6590 | and use it in all @code{define_insn_reservation} as in the following | |
6591 | construction | |
6592 | ||
6593 | @smallexample | |
68e4d4c5 | 6594 | (define_insn_reservation "simple" 2 (eq_attr "type" "int") |
fae15c93 VM |
6595 | "(i0_pipeline | i1_pipeline), finish") |
6596 | @end smallexample | |
6597 | ||
6598 | ||
a5249a21 HPN |
6599 | @end ifset |
6600 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
3262c1f5 RH |
6601 | @node Conditional Execution |
6602 | @section Conditional Execution | |
6603 | @cindex conditional execution | |
6604 | @cindex predication | |
6605 | ||
6606 | A number of architectures provide for some form of conditional | |
6607 | execution, or predication. The hallmark of this feature is the | |
6608 | ability to nullify most of the instructions in the instruction set. | |
6609 | When the instruction set is large and not entirely symmetric, it | |
6610 | can be quite tedious to describe these forms directly in the | |
6611 | @file{.md} file. An alternative is the @code{define_cond_exec} template. | |
6612 | ||
6613 | @findex define_cond_exec | |
6614 | @smallexample | |
6615 | (define_cond_exec | |
6616 | [@var{predicate-pattern}] | |
6617 | "@var{condition}" | |
630d3d5a | 6618 | "@var{output-template}") |
3262c1f5 RH |
6619 | @end smallexample |
6620 | ||
6621 | @var{predicate-pattern} is the condition that must be true for the | |
6622 | insn to be executed at runtime and should match a relational operator. | |
6623 | One can use @code{match_operator} to match several relational operators | |
6624 | at once. Any @code{match_operand} operands must have no more than one | |
6625 | alternative. | |
6626 | ||
6627 | @var{condition} is a C expression that must be true for the generated | |
6628 | pattern to match. | |
6629 | ||
6630 | @findex current_insn_predicate | |
630d3d5a | 6631 | @var{output-template} is a string similar to the @code{define_insn} |
3262c1f5 RH |
6632 | output template (@pxref{Output Template}), except that the @samp{*} |
6633 | and @samp{@@} special cases do not apply. This is only useful if the | |
6634 | assembly text for the predicate is a simple prefix to the main insn. | |
6635 | In order to handle the general case, there is a global variable | |
6636 | @code{current_insn_predicate} that will contain the entire predicate | |
6637 | if the current insn is predicated, and will otherwise be @code{NULL}. | |
6638 | ||
ebb48a4d JM |
6639 | When @code{define_cond_exec} is used, an implicit reference to |
6640 | the @code{predicable} instruction attribute is made. | |
e979f9e8 | 6641 | @xref{Insn Attributes}. This attribute must be boolean (i.e.@: have |
3262c1f5 RH |
6642 | exactly two elements in its @var{list-of-values}). Further, it must |
6643 | not be used with complex expressions. That is, the default and all | |
ebb48a4d | 6644 | uses in the insns must be a simple constant, not dependent on the |
3262c1f5 RH |
6645 | alternative or anything else. |
6646 | ||
ebb48a4d | 6647 | For each @code{define_insn} for which the @code{predicable} |
3262c1f5 RH |
6648 | attribute is true, a new @code{define_insn} pattern will be |
6649 | generated that matches a predicated version of the instruction. | |
6650 | For example, | |
6651 | ||
6652 | @smallexample | |
6653 | (define_insn "addsi" | |
6654 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r") | |
6655 | (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r") | |
6656 | (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r")))] | |
6657 | "@var{test1}" | |
6658 | "add %2,%1,%0") | |
6659 | ||
6660 | (define_cond_exec | |
6661 | [(ne (match_operand:CC 0 "register_operand" "c") | |
6662 | (const_int 0))] | |
6663 | "@var{test2}" | |
6664 | "(%0)") | |
6665 | @end smallexample | |
6666 | ||
6667 | @noindent | |
6668 | generates a new pattern | |
6669 | ||
6670 | @smallexample | |
6671 | (define_insn "" | |
6672 | [(cond_exec | |
6673 | (ne (match_operand:CC 3 "register_operand" "c") (const_int 0)) | |
6674 | (set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "r") | |
6675 | (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "r") | |
6676 | (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "r"))))] | |
6677 | "(@var{test2}) && (@var{test1})" | |
6678 | "(%3) add %2,%1,%0") | |
6679 | @end smallexample | |
c25c12b8 | 6680 | |
a5249a21 HPN |
6681 | @end ifset |
6682 | @ifset INTERNALS | |
c25c12b8 R |
6683 | @node Constant Definitions |
6684 | @section Constant Definitions | |
6685 | @cindex constant definitions | |
6686 | @findex define_constants | |
6687 | ||
6688 | Using literal constants inside instruction patterns reduces legibility and | |
6689 | can be a maintenance problem. | |
6690 | ||
6691 | To overcome this problem, you may use the @code{define_constants} | |
6692 | expression. It contains a vector of name-value pairs. From that | |
6693 | point on, wherever any of the names appears in the MD file, it is as | |
6694 | if the corresponding value had been written instead. You may use | |
6695 | @code{define_constants} multiple times; each appearance adds more | |
6696 | constants to the table. It is an error to redefine a constant with | |
6697 | a different value. | |
6698 | ||
6699 | To come back to the a29k load multiple example, instead of | |
6700 | ||
6701 | @smallexample | |
6702 | (define_insn "" | |
6703 | [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation" | |
6704 | [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r") | |
6705 | (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m")) | |
6706 | (use (reg:SI 179)) | |
6707 | (clobber (reg:SI 179))])] | |
6708 | "" | |
6709 | "loadm 0,0,%1,%2") | |
6710 | @end smallexample | |
6711 | ||
6712 | You could write: | |
6713 | ||
6714 | @smallexample | |
6715 | (define_constants [ | |
6716 | (R_BP 177) | |
6717 | (R_FC 178) | |
6718 | (R_CR 179) | |
6719 | (R_Q 180) | |
6720 | ]) | |
6721 | ||
6722 | (define_insn "" | |
6723 | [(match_parallel 0 "load_multiple_operation" | |
6724 | [(set (match_operand:SI 1 "gpc_reg_operand" "=r") | |
6725 | (match_operand:SI 2 "memory_operand" "m")) | |
6726 | (use (reg:SI R_CR)) | |
6727 | (clobber (reg:SI R_CR))])] | |
6728 | "" | |
6729 | "loadm 0,0,%1,%2") | |
6730 | @end smallexample | |
6731 | ||
6732 | The constants that are defined with a define_constant are also output | |
6733 | in the insn-codes.h header file as #defines. | |
b11cc610 | 6734 | @end ifset |
032e8348 RS |
6735 | @ifset INTERNALS |
6736 | @node Macros | |
6737 | @section Macros | |
6738 | @cindex macros in @file{.md} files | |
6739 | ||
6740 | Ports often need to define similar patterns for more than one machine | |
6741 | mode or for more than one rtx code. GCC provides some simple macro | |
6742 | facilities to make this process easier. | |
6743 | ||
6744 | @menu | |
6745 | * Mode Macros:: Generating variations of patterns for different modes. | |
6746 | * Code Macros:: Doing the same for codes. | |
6747 | @end menu | |
6748 | ||
6749 | @node Mode Macros | |
6750 | @subsection Mode Macros | |
6751 | @cindex mode macros in @file{.md} files | |
6752 | ||
6753 | Ports often need to define similar patterns for two or more different modes. | |
6754 | For example: | |
6755 | ||
6756 | @itemize @bullet | |
6757 | @item | |
6758 | If a processor has hardware support for both single and double | |
6759 | floating-point arithmetic, the @code{SFmode} patterns tend to be | |
6760 | very similar to the @code{DFmode} ones. | |
6761 | ||
6762 | @item | |
6763 | If a port uses @code{SImode} pointers in one configuration and | |
6764 | @code{DImode} pointers in another, it will usually have very similar | |
6765 | @code{SImode} and @code{DImode} patterns for manipulating pointers. | |
6766 | @end itemize | |
6767 | ||
6768 | Mode macros allow several patterns to be instantiated from one | |
6769 | @file{.md} file template. They can be used with any type of | |
6770 | rtx-based construct, such as a @code{define_insn}, | |
6771 | @code{define_split}, or @code{define_peephole2}. | |
6772 | ||
6773 | @menu | |
6774 | * Defining Mode Macros:: Defining a new mode macro. | |
f30990b2 | 6775 | * Substitutions:: Combining mode macros with substitutions |
032e8348 RS |
6776 | * Examples:: Examples |
6777 | @end menu | |
6778 | ||
6779 | @node Defining Mode Macros | |
6780 | @subsubsection Defining Mode Macros | |
6781 | @findex define_mode_macro | |
6782 | ||
6783 | The syntax for defining a mode macro is: | |
6784 | ||
6785 | @smallexample | |
6786 | (define_mode_macro @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{cond1}") ... (@var{moden} "@var{condn}")]) | |
6787 | @end smallexample | |
6788 | ||
6789 | This allows subsequent @file{.md} file constructs to use the mode suffix | |
6790 | @code{:@var{name}}. Every construct that does so will be expanded | |
6791 | @var{n} times, once with every use of @code{:@var{name}} replaced by | |
6792 | @code{:@var{mode1}}, once with every use replaced by @code{:@var{mode2}}, | |
6793 | and so on. In the expansion for a particular @var{modei}, every | |
6794 | C condition will also require that @var{condi} be true. | |
6795 | ||
6796 | For example: | |
6797 | ||
6798 | @smallexample | |
6799 | (define_mode_macro P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")]) | |
6800 | @end smallexample | |
6801 | ||
6802 | defines a new mode suffix @code{:P}. Every construct that uses | |
6803 | @code{:P} will be expanded twice, once with every @code{:P} replaced | |
6804 | by @code{:SI} and once with every @code{:P} replaced by @code{:DI}. | |
6805 | The @code{:SI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == SImode} and | |
6806 | the @code{:DI} version will only apply if @code{Pmode == DImode}. | |
6807 | ||
6808 | As with other @file{.md} conditions, an empty string is treated | |
6809 | as ``always true''. @code{(@var{mode} "")} can also be abbreviated | |
6810 | to @code{@var{mode}}. For example: | |
6811 | ||
6812 | @smallexample | |
6813 | (define_mode_macro GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")]) | |
6814 | @end smallexample | |
6815 | ||
6816 | means that the @code{:DI} expansion only applies if @code{TARGET_64BIT} | |
6817 | but that the @code{:SI} expansion has no such constraint. | |
6818 | ||
6819 | Macros are applied in the order they are defined. This can be | |
6820 | significant if two macros are used in a construct that requires | |
f30990b2 | 6821 | substitutions. @xref{Substitutions}. |
032e8348 | 6822 | |
f30990b2 ILT |
6823 | @node Substitutions |
6824 | @subsubsection Substitution in Mode Macros | |
032e8348 RS |
6825 | @findex define_mode_attr |
6826 | ||
6827 | If an @file{.md} file construct uses mode macros, each version of the | |
f30990b2 ILT |
6828 | construct will often need slightly different strings or modes. For |
6829 | example: | |
032e8348 RS |
6830 | |
6831 | @itemize @bullet | |
6832 | @item | |
6833 | When a @code{define_expand} defines several @code{add@var{m}3} patterns | |
6834 | (@pxref{Standard Names}), each expander will need to use the | |
6835 | appropriate mode name for @var{m}. | |
6836 | ||
6837 | @item | |
6838 | When a @code{define_insn} defines several instruction patterns, | |
6839 | each instruction will often use a different assembler mnemonic. | |
f30990b2 ILT |
6840 | |
6841 | @item | |
6842 | When a @code{define_insn} requires operands with different modes, | |
6843 | using a macro for one of the operand modes usually requires a specific | |
6844 | mode for the other operand(s). | |
032e8348 RS |
6845 | @end itemize |
6846 | ||
6847 | GCC supports such variations through a system of ``mode attributes''. | |
6848 | There are two standard attributes: @code{mode}, which is the name of | |
6849 | the mode in lower case, and @code{MODE}, which is the same thing in | |
6850 | upper case. You can define other attributes using: | |
6851 | ||
6852 | @smallexample | |
6853 | (define_mode_attr @var{name} [(@var{mode1} "@var{value1}") ... (@var{moden} "@var{valuen}")]) | |
6854 | @end smallexample | |
6855 | ||
6856 | where @var{name} is the name of the attribute and @var{valuei} | |
6857 | is the value associated with @var{modei}. | |
6858 | ||
f30990b2 ILT |
6859 | When GCC replaces some @var{:macro} with @var{:mode}, it will scan |
6860 | each string and mode in the pattern for sequences of the form | |
6861 | @code{<@var{macro}:@var{attr}>}, where @var{attr} is the name of a | |
6862 | mode attribute. If the attribute is defined for @var{mode}, the whole | |
6863 | @code{<...>} sequence will be replaced by the appropriate attribute | |
6864 | value. | |
032e8348 RS |
6865 | |
6866 | For example, suppose an @file{.md} file has: | |
6867 | ||
6868 | @smallexample | |
6869 | (define_mode_macro P [(SI "Pmode == SImode") (DI "Pmode == DImode")]) | |
6870 | (define_mode_attr load [(SI "lw") (DI "ld")]) | |
6871 | @end smallexample | |
6872 | ||
6873 | If one of the patterns that uses @code{:P} contains the string | |
6874 | @code{"<P:load>\t%0,%1"}, the @code{SI} version of that pattern | |
6875 | will use @code{"lw\t%0,%1"} and the @code{DI} version will use | |
6876 | @code{"ld\t%0,%1"}. | |
6877 | ||
f30990b2 ILT |
6878 | Here is an example of using an attribute for a mode: |
6879 | ||
6880 | @smallexample | |
6881 | (define_mode_macro LONG [SI DI]) | |
6882 | (define_mode_attr SHORT [(SI "HI") (DI "SI")]) | |
6883 | (define_insn ... | |
6884 | (sign_extend:LONG (match_operand:<LONG:SHORT> ...)) ...) | |
6885 | @end smallexample | |
6886 | ||
032e8348 RS |
6887 | The @code{@var{macro}:} prefix may be omitted, in which case the |
6888 | substitution will be attempted for every macro expansion. | |
6889 | ||
6890 | @node Examples | |
6891 | @subsubsection Mode Macro Examples | |
6892 | ||
6893 | Here is an example from the MIPS port. It defines the following | |
6894 | modes and attributes (among others): | |
6895 | ||
6896 | @smallexample | |
6897 | (define_mode_macro GPR [SI (DI "TARGET_64BIT")]) | |
6898 | (define_mode_attr d [(SI "") (DI "d")]) | |
6899 | @end smallexample | |
6900 | ||
6901 | and uses the following template to define both @code{subsi3} | |
6902 | and @code{subdi3}: | |
6903 | ||
6904 | @smallexample | |
6905 | (define_insn "sub<mode>3" | |
6906 | [(set (match_operand:GPR 0 "register_operand" "=d") | |
6907 | (minus:GPR (match_operand:GPR 1 "register_operand" "d") | |
6908 | (match_operand:GPR 2 "register_operand" "d")))] | |
6909 | "" | |
6910 | "<d>subu\t%0,%1,%2" | |
6911 | [(set_attr "type" "arith") | |
6912 | (set_attr "mode" "<MODE>")]) | |
6913 | @end smallexample | |
6914 | ||
6915 | This is exactly equivalent to: | |
6916 | ||
6917 | @smallexample | |
6918 | (define_insn "subsi3" | |
6919 | [(set (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "=d") | |
6920 | (minus:SI (match_operand:SI 1 "register_operand" "d") | |
6921 | (match_operand:SI 2 "register_operand" "d")))] | |
6922 | "" | |
6923 | "subu\t%0,%1,%2" | |
6924 | [(set_attr "type" "arith") | |
6925 | (set_attr "mode" "SI")]) | |
6926 | ||
6927 | (define_insn "subdi3" | |
6928 | [(set (match_operand:DI 0 "register_operand" "=d") | |
6929 | (minus:DI (match_operand:DI 1 "register_operand" "d") | |
6930 | (match_operand:DI 2 "register_operand" "d")))] | |
6931 | "" | |
6932 | "dsubu\t%0,%1,%2" | |
6933 | [(set_attr "type" "arith") | |
6934 | (set_attr "mode" "DI")]) | |
6935 | @end smallexample | |
6936 | ||
6937 | @node Code Macros | |
6938 | @subsection Code Macros | |
6939 | @cindex code macros in @file{.md} files | |
6940 | @findex define_code_macro | |
6941 | @findex define_code_attr | |
6942 | ||
6943 | Code macros operate in a similar way to mode macros. @xref{Mode Macros}. | |
6944 | ||
6945 | The construct: | |
6946 | ||
6947 | @smallexample | |
6948 | (define_code_macro @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{cond1}") ... (@var{coden} "@var{condn}")]) | |
6949 | @end smallexample | |
6950 | ||
6951 | defines a pseudo rtx code @var{name} that can be instantiated as | |
6952 | @var{codei} if condition @var{condi} is true. Each @var{codei} | |
6953 | must have the same rtx format. @xref{RTL Classes}. | |
6954 | ||
6955 | As with mode macros, each pattern that uses @var{name} will be | |
6956 | expanded @var{n} times, once with all uses of @var{name} replaced by | |
6957 | @var{code1}, once with all uses replaced by @var{code2}, and so on. | |
6958 | @xref{Defining Mode Macros}. | |
6959 | ||
6960 | It is possible to define attributes for codes as well as for modes. | |
6961 | There are two standard code attributes: @code{code}, the name of the | |
6962 | code in lower case, and @code{CODE}, the name of the code in upper case. | |
6963 | Other attributes are defined using: | |
6964 | ||
6965 | @smallexample | |
6966 | (define_code_attr @var{name} [(@var{code1} "@var{value1}") ... (@var{coden} "@var{valuen}")]) | |
6967 | @end smallexample | |
6968 | ||
6969 | Here's an example of code macros in action, taken from the MIPS port: | |
6970 | ||
6971 | @smallexample | |
6972 | (define_code_macro any_cond [unordered ordered unlt unge uneq ltgt unle ungt | |
6973 | eq ne gt ge lt le gtu geu ltu leu]) | |
6974 | ||
6975 | (define_expand "b<code>" | |
6976 | [(set (pc) | |
6977 | (if_then_else (any_cond:CC (cc0) | |
6978 | (const_int 0)) | |
6979 | (label_ref (match_operand 0 "")) | |
6980 | (pc)))] | |
6981 | "" | |
6982 | @{ | |
6983 | gen_conditional_branch (operands, <CODE>); | |
6984 | DONE; | |
6985 | @}) | |
6986 | @end smallexample | |
6987 | ||
6988 | This is equivalent to: | |
6989 | ||
6990 | @smallexample | |
6991 | (define_expand "bunordered" | |
6992 | [(set (pc) | |
6993 | (if_then_else (unordered:CC (cc0) | |
6994 | (const_int 0)) | |
6995 | (label_ref (match_operand 0 "")) | |
6996 | (pc)))] | |
6997 | "" | |
6998 | @{ | |
6999 | gen_conditional_branch (operands, UNORDERED); | |
7000 | DONE; | |
7001 | @}) | |
7002 | ||
7003 | (define_expand "bordered" | |
7004 | [(set (pc) | |
7005 | (if_then_else (ordered:CC (cc0) | |
7006 | (const_int 0)) | |
7007 | (label_ref (match_operand 0 "")) | |
7008 | (pc)))] | |
7009 | "" | |
7010 | @{ | |
7011 | gen_conditional_branch (operands, ORDERED); | |
7012 | DONE; | |
7013 | @}) | |
7014 | ||
7015 | ... | |
7016 | @end smallexample | |
7017 | ||
7018 | @end ifset |